Zebra DS4608 Product Reference Guide

DS4608
Imaging Scanner
Product Reference
Guide
MN-003378-03EN
Copyright
ZEBRA and the stylized Zebra head are trademarks of Zebra Technologies Corporation, registered in many
jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ©2019-2020 Zebra
Technologies Corporation and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
COPYRIGHTS & TRADEMARKS: For complete copyright and trademark information, go to www.zebra.com/
copyright.
WARRANTY: For complete warranty information, go to www.zebra.com/warranty.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT: For complete EULA information, go to www.zebra.com/eula.
For Australia Only
For Australia Only. This warranty is given by Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd., 71 Robinson Road, #0502/03, Singapore 068895, Singapore. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the
Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any
other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the
goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.
Zebra Technologies Corporation Australia’s limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you
may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Zebra Technologies
Corporation at +65 6858 0722. You may also visit our website: www.zebra.com for the most updated warranty
terms.
Terms of Use
•
Proprietary Statement
This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its subsidiaries
(“Zebra Technologies”). It is intended solely for the information and use of parties operating and
maintaining the equipment described herein. Such proprietary information may not be used, reproduced,
or disclosed to any other parties for any other purpose without the express, written permission of Zebra
Technologies.
•
Product Improvements
Continuous improvement of products is a policy of Zebra Technologies. All specifications and designs are
subject to change without notice.
•
Liability Disclaimer
Zebra Technologies takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering specifications and manuals are
correct; however, errors do occur. Zebra Technologies reserves the right to correct any such errors and
disclaims liability resulting therefrom.
•
Limitation of Liability
In no event shall Zebra Technologies or anyone else involved in the creation, production, or delivery of the
accompanying product (including hardware and software) be liable for any damages whatsoever
(including, without limitation, consequential damages including loss of business profits, business
interruption, or loss of business information) arising out of the use of, the results of use of, or inability to
use such product, even if Zebra Technologies has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some
jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above
limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
2
Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:
Change
Date
Description
-01 Rev A
6/2019
Initial Release
-02 Rev A
7/2019
Changes from various Jira issues
-03EN Rev A
1/2020
- Added the fast blinking red LED indication in Table 4.
- Updated the USB Cert information in Table 8, Table 9, and Table 10.
3
Table of Contents
Copyright ........................................................................................................................................... 2
For Australia Only ....................................................................................................................... 2
Terms of Use .................................................................................................................................... 2
Revision History ................................................................................................................................ 3
About This Guide
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 22
Configurations ................................................................................................................................. 22
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................... 23
Chapter Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 24
Notational Conventions ................................................................................................................... 25
Related Documents and Software .................................................................................................. 25
Service Information ......................................................................................................................... 26
Getting Started
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 27
Interfaces ........................................................................................................................................ 27
Unpacking ....................................................................................................................................... 27
Features .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Setting Up the Scanner ................................................................................................................... 28
Inserting the Interface Cable ..................................................................................................... 28
Removing the Interface Cable ................................................................................................... 29
Connecting Power (if required) ................................................................................................. 30
Configuring the Scanner ........................................................................................................... 30
123Scan and Software Tools
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 31
123Scan .......................................................................................................................................... 31
Communication with 123Scan ................................................................................................... 32
123Scan Requirements ............................................................................................................. 32
123Scan Information ................................................................................................................. 32
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos .................................................................... 33
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) ................................................................................................... 33
Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) ................................................................................................... 34
Preferred Symbol ............................................................................................................................ 34
4
Table of Contents
Data Capture
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 35
Beeper Definitions ........................................................................................................................... 35
LED Definitions ............................................................................................................................... 37
Scanning ......................................................................................................................................... 38
Scanning in Hands-Free (Presentation) Mode .......................................................................... 38
Assemble the Stand ............................................................................................................ 38
Mounting the Stand (optional) ............................................................................................. 39
Scanning with the Stand ..................................................................................................... 39
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode ................................................................................................... 40
Aiming ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Decode Ranges .............................................................................................................................. 42
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 44
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 44
Known Harmful Ingredients ....................................................................................................... 44
Approved Cleaners for the Imaging Scanner ............................................................................ 44
Approved Disinfectant Cleaners for Healthcare Configurations of the DS4608 Scanners ........ 45
Cleaning Agents Containing Active Ingredients .................................................................. 45
Brand Name Disinfectants .................................................................................................. 45
Cleaning the Imaging Scanner .................................................................................................. 45
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 46
Send Versions ................................................................................................................................. 49
Software Version ....................................................................................................................... 49
Serial Number ........................................................................................................................... 49
Manufacturing Information ........................................................................................................ 49
Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................. 50
Imaging Scanner Signal Descriptions ............................................................................................. 57
USB Interface
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 59
Setting Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 59
Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................. 59
Errors While Scanning .............................................................................................................. 60
Connecting a USB Interface ........................................................................................................... 60
USB Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................. 61
USB Host Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 62
USB Device Type ...................................................................................................................... 62
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking ............................................................... 64
USB Keystroke Delay ................................................................................................................ 65
USB Caps Lock Override .......................................................................................................... 65
Barcodes with Unknown Characters ......................................................................................... 66
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 ........................................................................................... 66
USB Fast HID ............................................................................................................................ 67
USB Polling Interval .................................................................................................................. 68
Keypad Emulation ..................................................................................................................... 70
Quick Keypad Emulation ........................................................................................................... 70
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero ....................................................................................... 71
5
Table of Contents
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution ............................................................................................... 71
Function Key Mapping .............................................................................................................. 72
Simulated Caps Lock ................................................................................................................ 72
Convert Case ............................................................................................................................ 73
USB Static CDC ........................................................................................................................ 74
CDC Beep on <BEL> ................................................................................................................ 74
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep ............................................................................................ 75
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive .............................................................................................. 75
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive .................................................................. 76
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version ................................................................................... 76
ASCII Character Sets ...................................................................................................................... 77
SSI Interface
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 78
Communication ............................................................................................................................... 78
SSI Commands ......................................................................................................................... 79
SSI Transactions ............................................................................................................................. 80
General Data Transactions ....................................................................................................... 80
ACK/NAK Handshaking ...................................................................................................... 80
Decoded Data Transmission ..................................................................................................... 81
ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data ............................................................................... 81
ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data ................................................................ 81
ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA ........................................................... 82
ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data ............................................................... 82
Communication Summary ............................................................................................................... 83
RTS/CTS Lines ......................................................................................................................... 83
ACK/NAK Option ....................................................................................................................... 83
Number of Data Bits .................................................................................................................. 83
Serial Response Timeout .......................................................................................................... 83
Retries ....................................................................................................................................... 83
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking .............................. 83
Errors ........................................................................................................................................ 83
SSI Communication Notes ........................................................................................................ 84
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI ............................................................................. 84
Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI ............................................................... 85
Command Structure .................................................................................................................. 85
Response Structure .................................................................................................................. 85
Example Transaction ................................................................................................................ 86
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device ...................................... 86
Response from Device with Packet Size Information ......................................................... 86
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information .................................................... 86
Response from Device with Diagnostic Information ............................................................ 86
Setting Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 87
Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................. 87
Errors While Scanning .............................................................................................................. 87
Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults .................................................................................... 88
SSI Host Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 89
Select SSI Host ......................................................................................................................... 89
Baud Rate ................................................................................................................................. 89
Parity ......................................................................................................................................... 91
6
Table of Contents
Check Parity .............................................................................................................................. 91
Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................... 92
Software Handshaking .............................................................................................................. 93
Host RTS Line State ................................................................................................................. 94
Decode Data Packet Format ..................................................................................................... 94
Host Serial Response Timeout ................................................................................................. 95
Host Character Timeout ............................................................................................................ 96
Multipacket Option .................................................................................................................... 97
Interpacket Delay ...................................................................................................................... 98
Event Reporting .............................................................................................................................. 99
Decode Event ............................................................................................................................ 99
Boot Up Event ......................................................................................................................... 100
Parameter Event ..................................................................................................................... 100
RS-232 Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 101
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 101
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 102
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 102
Connecting an RS-232 Interface ................................................................................................... 102
RS-232 Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................................... 103
RS-232 Host-Specific Parameter Settings .................................................................................... 104
RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters ............................................................................. 105
RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................................. 107
Baud Rate ............................................................................................................................... 109
Parity ....................................................................................................................................... 111
Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................. 112
Data Bits .................................................................................................................................. 112
Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................................. 113
Hardware Handshaking ........................................................................................................... 113
Software Handshaking ............................................................................................................ 115
Host Serial Response Timeout ............................................................................................... 117
RTS Line State ........................................................................................................................ 118
Beep on <BEL> ....................................................................................................................... 118
Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................................ 119
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ...................................................................................................... 120
Barcodes with Unknown Characters ....................................................................................... 120
ASCII Character Sets .................................................................................................................... 121
IBM 468X / 469X Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 122
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 122
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 122
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 122
Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host ............................................................................................ 123
IBM Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................ 124
IBM Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 125
Port Address ........................................................................................................................... 125
Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................................. 126
7
Table of Contents
RS-485 Beep Directive ............................................................................................................ 126
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive ................................................................................ 127
IBM-485 Specification Version ................................................................................................ 127
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 128
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 128
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 128
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 129
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ..................................................................................... 129
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................... 130
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters .............................................................................................. 131
Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................................. 131
Barcodes with Unknown Characters ....................................................................................... 131
Keystroke Delay ...................................................................................................................... 132
Intra-keystroke Delay .............................................................................................................. 132
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ..................................................................................... 133
Quick Keypad Emulation ......................................................................................................... 133
Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................................. 134
Caps Lock Override ................................................................................................................ 134
Convert Case .......................................................................................................................... 135
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 136
FN1 Substitution ...................................................................................................................... 136
Send Make and Break ............................................................................................................. 137
Keyboard Map ............................................................................................................................... 137
ASCII Character Sets .................................................................................................................... 137
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 138
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 138
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 138
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 138
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults ..................................................... 139
User Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 142
Default Parameters ................................................................................................................. 142
Write to Custom Defaults .................................................................................................. 142
Parameter Barcode Scanning ................................................................................................. 143
Beep After Good Decode ........................................................................................................ 144
Beeper Volume ....................................................................................................................... 145
Beeper Tone ........................................................................................................................... 146
Beeper Duration ...................................................................................................................... 147
Suppress Power Up Beeps ..................................................................................................... 148
LED on Good Decode ............................................................................................................. 149
Direct Decode Indicator ........................................................................................................... 149
Decode Pager Motor (DS4608-HC Only and DS4608-DPE) .................................................. 150
Decode Pager Motor Duration (DS4608-HC Only) ................................................................. 151
Night Mode (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only) ................................................................. 153
Night Mode Trigger (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only) ............................................... 154
Night Mode Toggle (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only) ............................................... 154
8
Table of Contents
Low Power Mode .................................................................................................................... 155
Time Delay to Low Power Mode 156
Hand-held Trigger Mode ......................................................................................................... 158
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern .......................................................................................... 159
Hands-free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern ................................................................. 160
Hands-free Mode .................................................................................................................... 161
Picklist Mode ........................................................................................................................... 162
Continuous Barcode Read ...................................................................................................... 163
Unique Barcode Reporting ...................................................................................................... 164
Decode Session Timeout ........................................................................................................ 164
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................................. 165
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols ....................................................................... 165
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol .......................................................................................... 166
Mobile Phone/Display Mode ................................................................................................... 167
PDF Prioritization .................................................................................................................... 168
PDF Prioritization Timeout ...................................................................................................... 169
Presentation Mode Field of View ............................................................................................ 170
Decoding Illumination .............................................................................................................. 171
Illumination Brightness ............................................................................................................ 172
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Modes Only) ................................................................ 173
Product ID (PID) Type ............................................................................................................. 174
Product ID (PID) Value ............................................................................................................ 174
ECLevel ................................................................................................................................... 175
DPM Parameters (DS4608-DPE Only) ......................................................................................... 176
DPM Illumination Control ........................................................................................................ 176
DPM Mode .............................................................................................................................. 177
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................................. 178
Enter Key ................................................................................................................................ 178
Tab Key ................................................................................................................................... 178
Transmit Code ID Character ................................................................................................... 179
Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................................. 180
Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................................. 181
FN1 Substitution Values .......................................................................................................... 183
Transmit “No Read” Message ................................................................................................. 184
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval ................................................................................................. 185
securPharm Decoding ............................................................................................................. 186
securPharm Output Formatting ............................................................................................... 187
Sample GS1 Format ......................................................................................................... 187
Sample IFA Format ........................................................................................................... 188
securPharm Output Formatting Barcodes ......................................................................... 189
Image Capture Preferences
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 190
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 190
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 191
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 191
Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 191
Image Capture Preferences .......................................................................................................... 193
Operational Modes .................................................................................................................. 193
Decode Mode .................................................................................................................... 193
9
Table of Contents
Snapshot Mode ................................................................................................................. 193
Video Mode ....................................................................................................................... 193
Image Capture Illumination ..................................................................................................... 194
Image Capture Autoexposure ................................................................................................. 194
Fixed Exposure ....................................................................................................................... 195
Analog and Digital Gain .......................................................................................................... 196
Analog Gain ...................................................................................................................... 196
Digital Gain ........................................................................................................................ 196
Snapshot Mode Timeout ......................................................................................................... 197
Snapshot Aiming Pattern ........................................................................................................ 198
Silence Operational Mode Changes ....................................................................................... 198
Image Cropping ....................................................................................................................... 199
Crop to Pixel Addresses .......................................................................................................... 199
Image Size (Number of Pixels) ............................................................................................... 201
Image Brightness (Target White) ............................................................................................ 202
JPEG Image Options .............................................................................................................. 202
JPEG Quality Value ................................................................................................................ 203
JPEG Size Value ..................................................................................................................... 203
Image Enhancement ............................................................................................................... 204
Image File Format Selector ..................................................................................................... 205
Image Rotation ........................................................................................................................ 206
Bits Per Pixel ........................................................................................................................... 207
Signature Capture ................................................................................................................... 208
Signature Capture File Format Selector .................................................................................. 209
Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel ............................................................................................. 210
Signature Capture Width ......................................................................................................... 211
Signature Capture Height ........................................................................................................ 211
Signature Capture JPEG Quality ............................................................................................ 212
Video Mode Format Selector .................................................................................................. 212
Video View Finder ................................................................................................................... 213
Target Video Frame Size ........................................................................................................ 213
Video View Finder Image Size ................................................................................................ 214
Video Resolution ..................................................................................................................... 214
Symbologies
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 215
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 215
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 216
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 216
Symbology Parameter Defaults .................................................................................................... 216
Enable/Disable All Code Types .................................................................................................... 223
UPC/EAN/JAN .............................................................................................................................. 224
UPC-A ..................................................................................................................................... 224
UPC-E ..................................................................................................................................... 224
UPC-E1 ................................................................................................................................... 225
EAN-8/JAN-8 ........................................................................................................................... 225
EAN-13/JAN-13 ....................................................................................................................... 226
Bookland EAN ......................................................................................................................... 226
Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................................... 227
ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................................... 228
10
Table of Contents
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals .................................................................................. 229
User-Programmable Supplementals ....................................................................................... 232
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................................ 232
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format ......................................................................... 233
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit ................................................................................................... 234
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit ................................................................................................... 234
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................................. 235
UPC-A Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 236
UPC-E Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 237
UPC-E1 Preamble ................................................................................................................... 238
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ....................................................................................................... 239
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ..................................................................................................... 239
EAN/JAN Zero Extend ............................................................................................................ 240
UCC Coupon Extended Code ................................................................................................. 240
Coupon Report ........................................................................................................................ 241
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone ...................................................................................................... 242
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................................... 242
Set Lengths for Code 128 ....................................................................................................... 243
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ......................................................................................... 244
ISBT 128 ................................................................................................................................. 245
ISBT Concatenation ................................................................................................................ 246
Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................................... 247
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................................... 247
Code 128 <FNC4> .................................................................................................................. 248
Code 128 Security Level ......................................................................................................... 249
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone .............................................................................................. 250
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................................ 250
Trioptic Code 39 ...................................................................................................................... 251
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 .................................................................................................. 251
Code 32 Prefix ........................................................................................................................ 252
Set Lengths for Code 39 ......................................................................................................... 252
Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 254
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................................ 254
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................................. 255
Code 39 Security Level ........................................................................................................... 256
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................ 258
Code 93 ........................................................................................................................................ 258
Set Lengths for Code 93 ......................................................................................................... 259
Code 11 ........................................................................................................................................ 261
Set Lengths for Code 11 ......................................................................................................... 261
Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 263
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits .............................................................................................. 264
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) ................................................................................................................. 264
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................... 265
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................... 267
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................................... 267
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ...................................................................................................... 268
Febraban ................................................................................................................................. 268
I 2 of 5 Security Level .............................................................................................................. 269
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................... 270
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) .................................................................................................................... 270
11
Table of Contents
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................................ 271
Codabar (NW - 7) .......................................................................................................................... 273
Set Lengths for Codabar ......................................................................................................... 273
CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................................ 275
NOTIS Editing ......................................................................................................................... 275
Codabar Security Level ........................................................................................................... 276
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters ............................................................ 277
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................... 277
Transmit Codabar Check Digit ................................................................................................ 278
MSI ................................................................................................................................................ 278
Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................................ 279
MSI Check Digits ..................................................................................................................... 280
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................................... 281
MSI Check Digit Algorithm ...................................................................................................... 281
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone ........................................................................................................ 282
Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 282
Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................................. 283
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................... 283
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ......................................................................................................... 285
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit .......................................................................................... 285
Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ 286
Inverse 1D ..................................................................................................................................... 287
GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................................. 288
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) ..................................................... 288
GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................................. 288
GS1 DataBar Expanded .......................................................................................................... 289
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN ................................................................................ 289
GS1 DataBar Security Level ................................................................................................... 290
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check ....................................................................................... 291
GS1 DataBar Expanded Security Level .................................................................................. 292
Symbology-Specific Security Features ......................................................................................... 293
Redundancy Level .................................................................................................................. 293
Security Level .......................................................................................................................... 295
1D Quiet Zone Level ............................................................................................................... 296
Intercharacter Gap Size .......................................................................................................... 297
Composite ..................................................................................................................................... 298
Composite CC-C ..................................................................................................................... 298
Composite CC-A/B .................................................................................................................. 298
Composite TLC-39 .................................................................................................................. 299
Composite Inverse .................................................................................................................. 299
UPC Composite Mode ............................................................................................................ 300
Composite Beep Mode ............................................................................................................ 301
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes ................................................... 302
2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................................ 303
PDF417 ................................................................................................................................... 303
MicroPDF417 .......................................................................................................................... 303
Code 128 Emulation ................................................................................................................ 304
Data Matrix .............................................................................................................................. 305
GS1 Data Matrix ...................................................................................................................... 305
Data Matrix Inverse ................................................................................................................. 306
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images ......................................................................................... 307
12
Table of Contents
Maxicode ................................................................................................................................. 308
QR Code ................................................................................................................................. 309
GS1 QR .................................................................................................................................. 309
MicroQR .................................................................................................................................. 310
Linked QR Mode ..................................................................................................................... 311
Aztec ....................................................................................................................................... 312
Aztec Inverse .......................................................................................................................... 313
Han Xin ................................................................................................................................... 314
Han Xin Inverse ....................................................................................................................... 315
Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................... 316
Grid Matrix Inverse .................................................................................................................. 317
Grid Matrix Mirror .................................................................................................................... 318
DotCode .................................................................................................................................. 319
DotCode Inverse ..................................................................................................................... 320
DotCode Mirrored .................................................................................................................... 321
DotCode Prioritize ................................................................................................................... 322
Macro PDF Features ..................................................................................................................... 322
Escape Characters .................................................................................................................. 323
Flush Macro PDF Buffer .......................................................................................................... 323
Abort Macro PDF Entry ........................................................................................................... 323
Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................. 324
US Postnet .............................................................................................................................. 324
US Planet ................................................................................................................................ 324
Transmit US Postal Check Digit .............................................................................................. 325
UK Postal ................................................................................................................................ 325
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit .............................................................................................. 326
Japan Postal ........................................................................................................................... 326
Australia Post .......................................................................................................................... 327
Australia Post Format .............................................................................................................. 328
Netherlands KIX Code ........................................................................................................... 329
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ..................................................................................... 329
UPU FICS Postal .................................................................................................................... 330
Mailmark .................................................................................................................................. 330
OCR Programming
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 331
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 331
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 331
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 332
OCR Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................................. 332
OCR Programming Parameters .................................................................................................... 333
OCR-A ..................................................................................................................................... 333
OCR-A Variant ........................................................................................................................ 334
OCR-B ..................................................................................................................................... 336
OCR-B Variant ........................................................................................................................ 337
MICR E13B ............................................................................................................................. 341
US Currency Serial Number .................................................................................................... 342
OCR Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 342
OCR Lines ............................................................................................................................... 344
OCR Minimum Characters ...................................................................................................... 344
13
Table of Contents
OCR Maximum Characters ..................................................................................................... 345
OCR Subset ............................................................................................................................ 345
OCR Quiet Zone ..................................................................................................................... 346
OCR Template ........................................................................................................................ 347
Required Digit (9) .............................................................................................................. 347
Required Alpha (A) ............................................................................................................ 347
Require and Suppress (0) ................................................................................................. 348
Optional Alphanumeric (1) ................................................................................................ 348
Optional Alpha (2) ............................................................................................................. 348
Alpha or Digit (3) ............................................................................................................... 349
Any Including Space & Reject (4) ..................................................................................... 349
Any except Space & Reject (5) ......................................................................................... 349
Optional Digit (7) ............................................................................................................... 350
Digit or Fill (8) .................................................................................................................... 350
Alpha or Fill (F) .................................................................................................................. 350
Optional Space ( ) ............................................................................................................. 351
Optional Small Special (.) .................................................................................................. 351
Other Template Operators ................................................................................................ 351
Repeat Previous (R) .......................................................................................................... 355
Multiple Templates ............................................................................................................ 356
Template Examples .......................................................................................................... 356
OCR Check Digit Modulus ...................................................................................................... 356
OCR Check Digit Multiplier ..................................................................................................... 357
OCR Check Digit Validation .................................................................................................... 359
None .................................................................................................................................. 359
Product Add Left to Right .................................................................................................. 359
Digit Add Left to Right ....................................................................................................... 360
Digit Add Right to Left ....................................................................................................... 361
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder ................................................................... 361
Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder ....................................................................... 362
Health Industry - HIBCC43 ................................................................................................ 363
Inverse OCR ........................................................................................................................... 364
OCR Redundancy ................................................................................................................... 365
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 366
The IDC Process ........................................................................................................................... 366
Barcode Acceptance Test ....................................................................................................... 367
Capture Region Determination ................................................................................................ 367
IDC Operating Mode = Anchored ...................................................................................... 367
IDC Operating Mode = Free-Form or Linked .................................................................... 368
Image Post Processing ........................................................................................................... 368
Data Transmission .................................................................................................................. 368
PC Application and Programming Support ................................................................................... 368
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 368
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 369
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 369
Image Document Capture Parameter Defaults ....................................................................... 370
IDC Operating Mode ............................................................................................................... 371
IDC Symbology ....................................................................................................................... 372
14
Table of Contents
IDC X Coordinate .................................................................................................................... 373
IDC Y Coordinate .................................................................................................................... 373
IDC Width ................................................................................................................................ 374
IDC Height ............................................................................................................................... 374
IDC Aspect .............................................................................................................................. 375
IDC File Format Selector ......................................................................................................... 375
IDC Bits Per Pixel .................................................................................................................... 376
IDC JPEG Quality ................................................................................................................... 377
IDC Find Box Outline .............................................................................................................. 377
IDC Minimum Text Length ...................................................................................................... 378
IDC Maximum Text Length ..................................................................................................... 378
IDC Captured Image Brighten ................................................................................................. 379
IDC Captured Image Sharpen ................................................................................................. 380
IDC Border Type ..................................................................................................................... 381
IDC Delay Time ....................................................................................................................... 382
IDC Zoom Limit ....................................................................................................................... 382
IDC Maximum Rotation ........................................................................................................... 383
Quick Start .................................................................................................................................... 384
Sample IDC Setup .................................................................................................................. 384
IDC Demonstrations ................................................................................................................ 385
Anchored Mode Demo ...................................................................................................... 385
Free-Form Mode Demo ..................................................................................................... 385
Linked Mode Demo ........................................................................................................... 385
Other Suggestions .................................................................................................................. 386
Quick Start Form ..................................................................................................................... 386
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 387
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) ................................................................................................. 387
Multicode Data Formatting (Hand-held Mode Only) ..................................................................... 387
Programming a Scanner ......................................................................................................... 388
Preferred Symbol .......................................................................................................................... 388
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 389
Driver’s License Parsing ............................................................................................................... 390
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) ................................ 391
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type ...................................................... 391
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes ................................................................................... 392
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes ................................................................................................ 395
Parser Version ID Barcode ..................................................................................................... 405
User Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 405
Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................................. 405
Output Gender as M or F ........................................................................................................ 405
Date Format ............................................................................................................................ 406
No Separator ..................................................................................................................... 408
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................................... 409
Control Characters ............................................................................................................ 409
Keyboard Characters 414
15
Table of Contents
Parsing Rule Example .................................................................................................................. 430
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example ................................................................ 434
Standard Parameter Defaults
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 436
Numeric Barcodes
Numeric Barcodes ........................................................................................................................ 450
Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... 452
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... 453
Alphanumeric Barcodes ................................................................................................................ 454
ASCII Character Sets
Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................................ 482
AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................................... 484
Communication Protocol Functionality
Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface ..................................................... 489
Country Codes
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 491
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ....................................... 491
Country Code Barcodes ................................................................................................................ 492
Country Code Pages
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 509
Country Code Page Defaults ........................................................................................................ 509
Country Code Page Barcodes ...................................................................................................... 513
CJK Decode Control
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 533
CJK Control Parameters ............................................................................................................... 534
Unicode Output Control ........................................................................................................... 534
CJK Output Method to Windows Host ..................................................................................... 535
Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output ............................................................................................... 541
Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters 542
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host .......................................................................... 543
Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output .................................. 543
16
Table of Contents
Adding CJK IME on Windows ................................................................................................. 543
Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host ................................................... 544
Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host .................................................. 545
Signature Capture Code
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 546
Code Structure .............................................................................................................................. 546
Signature Capture Area .......................................................................................................... 546
CapCode Pattern Structure ..................................................................................................... 547
Start / Stop Patterns ...................................................................................................................... 547
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................... 548
Data Format .................................................................................................................................. 548
Additional Capabilities ................................................................................................................... 548
Signature Boxes ............................................................................................................................ 549
Non-Parameter Attributes
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 550
Attributes ....................................................................................................................................... 550
Model Number ......................................................................................................................... 550
Serial Number ......................................................................................................................... 550
Date of Manufacture ................................................................................................................ 551
Date of First Programming ...................................................................................................... 551
Configuration Filename ........................................................................................................... 551
Beeper/LED ............................................................................................................................. 552
Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................. 553
Beep on Next Bootup .............................................................................................................. 553
Reboot ..................................................................................................................................... 553
Host Trigger Session ............................................................................................................... 553
Firmware Version .................................................................................................................... 554
Scankit Version ....................................................................................................................... 554
Sample Barcodes
UPC/EAN ..................................................................................................................................... 555
UPC-A, 100% .......................................................................................................................... 555
UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 555
UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 556
UPC-E ..................................................................................................................................... 556
UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 556
UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 557
EAN-8 ...................................................................................................................................... 557
EAN-13, 100% ........................................................................................................................ 557
EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on ..................................................................................................... 558
EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on ..................................................................................................... 558
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................................... 558
GS1-128 .................................................................................................................................. 559
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................................ 559
Code 93 ........................................................................................................................................ 559
Code 11 with 2 Check Digits ......................................................................................................... 560
17
Table of Contents
Interleaved 2 of 5 .......................................................................................................................... 560
MSI with 2 Check Digits ................................................................................................................ 560
Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 561
Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................................. 561
Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ 561
GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................................. 562
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) ..................................................... 562
GS1 DataBar Truncated .......................................................................................................... 562
GS1 DataBar Stacked ............................................................................................................. 562
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional ................................................................................... 563
GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................................. 563
GS1 DataBar Expanded .......................................................................................................... 563
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ............................................................................................ 564
2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................................ 564
PDF417 ................................................................................................................................... 564
Data Matrix .............................................................................................................................. 564
GS1 Data Matrix ...................................................................................................................... 565
Maxicode ................................................................................................................................. 565
QR Code ................................................................................................................................. 565
GS1 QR ................................................................................................................................... 565
MicroQR .................................................................................................................................. 566
Aztec ....................................................................................................................................... 566
Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................... 566
Han Xin ................................................................................................................................... 567
Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................. 567
US Postnet .............................................................................................................................. 567
UK Postal ................................................................................................................................ 567
Japan Postal ........................................................................................................................... 567
Australian Post ........................................................................................................................ 568
OCR .............................................................................................................................................. 568
OCR-A ..................................................................................................................................... 568
OCR-B ..................................................................................................................................... 568
MICR E13B ............................................................................................................................. 568
US Currency ............................................................................................................................ 569
18
List of Figures
Figure 1. Parts of the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Figure 2. Inserting the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Figure 3. Removing the Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Figure 4. Assembling the Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Figure 5. Mounting the Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Figure 6. Inserting the Scanner in the Gooseneck Intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Figure 7. Centering the Aiming Dot on the Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Figure 8. Aiming Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Figure 9. Scanning Orientation with Aiming Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Figure 10. Acceptable Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Figure 11. Incorrect Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Figure 12. Imaging Scanner Cable Pinouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Figure 13. USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Figure 14. RS-232 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Figure 15. IBM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Figure 16. Keyboard Wedge Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Figure 17. IBM PS2 Type Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Figure 18. Quick Start Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Figure 19. CapCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Figure 20. CapCode Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Figure 21. Acceptable Signature Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
19
List of Tables
Table 1. Scanner Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Table 2. Scanner Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Table 3. Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Table 4. Standard LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Table 5. DS4608SR/DL/HD/HC Decode Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Table 6. DS4608-DPE Decode Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Table 7. Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Table 8. Technical Specifications - DS4608-SR/DS4608-DL/DS4608-HD/DS4608-HL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Table 9. Technical Specifications - DS4608-HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 10. Technical Specifications - DS4608-DPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Table 11. DS4608 Imaging Scanner Signal Pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Table 12. USB Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Table 13. SSI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Table 14. Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Table 15. Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Table 16. Response Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Table 17. SSI Interface Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Table 18. Event Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Table 19. RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Table 20. RS-232 Host-Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Table 21. RS-232 Host-Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Table 22. RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Table 23. RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Table 24. IBM 468X/469X Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Table 25. Keyboard Wedge Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Table 26. User Preferences Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Table 27. Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Table 28. Image Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Table 29. Output File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Table 30. Resolution and Video Image Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Table 31. Symbology Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Table 32. OCR Programming Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Table 33. Table of Numeric Value Assignments for Computing HIBC LIC Data Format Check Digit . . . . . . . . . .363
Table 34. Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Table 35. IDC Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Table 36. DL Parsing Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Table 37. Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Table 38. ASCII Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Table 39. ALT Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Table 40. GUI Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Table 41. PF Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Table 42. F Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
20
List of Tables
Table 43. Numeric Key Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Table 44. Extended Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Table 45. Symbol Code Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Table 46. Aim Code Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Table 47. Modifier Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Table 48. Communication Interface Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Table 49. Country Code Page Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Table 50. Start / Stop Pattern Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Table 51. User Defined CapCode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Table 52. Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Table 53. Beeper/LED Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
21
About This Guide
Introduction
The DS4608 scanner Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining,
and troubleshooting the DS4608 scanner.
Configurations
This guide includes the DS4608 scanner configurations listed in Table 1.
Table 1
Scanner Configurations
Part Number
Description
DS4608-SR00006ZZWW
Area Imager, Standard Range, White (Scanner Only)
DS4608-SR00007ZZWW
Area Imager, Standard Range, Twilight Black (Scanner Only)
DS4608-SR00007ZZAP
Area Imager, Standard Range, Twilight Black, APAC Only (Scanner Only)
DS4608-SR00007ZZY
Area Imager, Standard Range, Twilight Black, India Only (Scanner Only)
DS4608-DL00006ZZWW
Area Imager, Standard Range, White, Driver's License Parsing U.S. Only
(Scanner Only)
DS4608-DL00007ZZWW
Area Imager, Standard Range, Twilight Black, Driver's License Parsing U.S.
Only (Scanner Only)
DS4608-HD00007ZZWW
Area Imager, High Density, Twilight Black (Scanner Only)
DS4608-HD00007ZZAP
Area Imager, High Density, Twilight Black, APAC Only (Scanner Only)
DS4608-HD00007ZCWW
Area Imager, High Density, Twilight Black, Checkpoint EAS (Scanner Only)
DS4608-HC4000BZZWW
Area Imager, Healthcare, HC White (Scanner Only)
DS4608-HC4000BZZWW
Area Imager, Healthcare, HC White, APAC Only (Scanner Only)
DS4608-HL00007ZZWW
Area Imager, High Density, Twilight Black, Driver's License Parsing U.S. Only
(Scanner Only)
22
About This Guide
Table 1
Scanner Configurations (Continued)
Part Number
Description
DS4608-TT00007ZZJP
Area Imager, Standard Range, Twilight Black, Toshiba TEC (Scanner Only)
DS4608-DPE0007VZRW
Area Imager, Electronics DPM, Corded, White Illumination, Twilight Black,
Vibration Motor - NA, LA, EMEA Only
Accessories
NOTE: Check Solution Builder for additional information regarding all available accessories, and the latest available
configurations.
The scanner ships with the DS4608 Quick Start Guide. The following required accessories must be ordered:
•
Interface cable for the appropriate interface. For example, a shielded connector cable when connecting via
USB.
•
Universal power supply, if the interface requires this.
•
Gooseneck Intellistand for hands-free operation of the DS4608.
The product configurations related to the DS4608 scanner are listed in Table 2.
Table 2
Scanner Accessories
Product Type
Cables
Part Number
Description
For information about cables, cable compatibility, and the full list of supported cables go to the
Zebra Partner Portal at:
https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scanne
rs/Universal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
Stands and
Holders
(optional)
20-71043-04R (Black)
Gooseneck Intellistand
20-71043-0BR (HC White)
STND-GS00UNC-04 (Black)
Universal Gooseneck Intellistand
21-71043-04R (Black)
Cup
21-71043-0BR (HC White)
STND-DC0081-04 (Black)
Document capture stand
11-66553-06R (Twilight Black)
Wall Mount Hook
20-70777-01R (Twilight Black)
Desk Holder
23
About This Guide
Table 2
Scanner Accessories (Continued)
Product Type
Part Number
Description
Power Supplies
(if required)
PWR-WUA5V4W0WW
5.2VDC,1.1A, All WW Adapter Plugs, Level 6 Compliant
PWR-WUA5V4W0US
5.2VDC,1.1A, US Adapter Plug, Level 6 Compliant
PWR-WUA5V4W0EU
5.2VDC, 1.1A, EU and UK Adapter Plug, Level 6 Compliant
PWR-WUA5V4W0BR
5.2VDC, 1.1A, Brazil Adapter Plug, Level 6 Compliant
PWR-WUA5V4W0CN
5.2VDC, 1.1A, China Adapter Plug, Level 6 Compliant
PWR-WUA5V4W0IN
5.2VDC, 1.1A, India Adapter Plug, Level 6 Compliant
PWR-WUA5V4W0AU
5.2VDC, 1.1A, Austrailia Adapter Plug, Level 6 Compliant
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
•
Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection information.
•
123Scan and Software Tools describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner
operation.
•
Data Capture provides beeper and LED definitions, scanning instructions and tips, and decode ranges.
•
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications provides suggested scanner maintenance,
troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).
•
USB Interface describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host.
•
SSI Interface describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a
communications link between Zebra decoders and a serial host.
•
RS-232 Interface describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host.
•
IBM 468X / 469X Interface describes how to set up the scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host.
•
Keyboard Wedge Interface describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the scanner.
•
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options describes each user preference feature and provides
programming barcodes for selecting these features.
•
Image Capture Preferences describes imaging preference features and provides programming barcodes
for selecting these features.
•
Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these
features.
•
OCR Programming describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming.
•
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) describes IDC, an advanced image processing firmware, including
IDC functionality, parameter barcodes to control its features, and a quick start procedure.
•
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol describes the Zebra software tools available for
customizing scanner operation.
•
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL) describes how to program the DSXXXX-DL scanner to read and
use the data contained in the 2D barcodes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
•
Standard Parameter Defaults provides a table of all host and miscellaneous scanner defaults.
24
About This Guide
•
Numeric Barcodes includes the numeric barcodes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric
values.
•
Alphanumeric Barcodes includes the alphanumeric barcodes to scan for parameters requiring specific
alphanumeric values.
•
ASCII Character Sets provides tables for ASCII character values and other character sets.
•
Programming Reference provides tables for Symbol code identifiers, AIM code identifiers, and modifier
characters.
•
Communication Protocol Functionality lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.
•
Country Codes provides barcodes for programming the country keyboard type for the USB keyboard (HID)
device and the keyboard wedge host.
•
Country Code Pages provides barcodes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type.
•
CJK Decode Control describes control parameters for Unicode/CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode
decode through USB HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
•
Signature Capture Code describes CapCode, a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a
document and allows the scanner to capture a signature.
•
Non-Parameter Attributes defines non-parameter attributes.
•
Sample Barcodes includes sample barcodes of various code types.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
•
•
•
Bold text is used to highlight the following:
•
Parameter names and options
•
Parameter barcode captions
•
Dialog box, window and screen names
•
Drop-down list and list box names
•
Check box and radio button names
•
Icons on a screen
•
Key names on a keypad
•
Button names on a screen.
Bullets (•) indicate:
•
Action items
•
Lists of alternatives
•
Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
Related Documents and Software
The following documents provide more information about the DS4608 scanner.
•
DS4608 Quick Start Guide, p/n MN-003599-xx, provides general information for getting started with the
DS4608 scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.
25
About This Guide
•
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx, provides information on ADF, a means
of customizing data before transmission to a host.
•
MDF and Preferred Symbol User Guide, p/n MN-002895-xx, provides information on Multicode Data
Formatting (MDF), which enables a 2D imaging scanner to scan all barcodes on a label, and then modify
and transmit the data to meet host application requirements.
•
Attribute Data Dictionary, p/n 72E-149786-xx defines attribute numbers (device configuration parameters,
monitored data, and born-on information) and describes management of various attribute domains for
barcode scanners and OEM engines.
•
Plural Stage Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72E-67113-xx, provides the barcodes necessary to program the
DS4608 scanner to decode Plural Stage barcodes and enable Supplemental Recognition Characters.
•
Toshiba TEC Programmer’s Guide, p/n MN-002707-xx, provides information on programming the Toshiba
TEC USB device type.
For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: zebra.com/support.
Service Information
If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Zebra Global Customer Support for your region. Contact
information is available at: zebra.com/support.
When contacting support, please have the following information available:
•
Serial number of the unit
•
Model number or product name
•
Software type and version number.
Zebra responds to calls by email, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements.
If your problem cannot be solved by Zebra Customer Support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing
and will be given specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the
approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.
If you purchased your Zebra business product from a Zebra business partner, contact that business partner for
support.
Provide Documentation Feedback
If you have comments, questions, or suggestions about this guide, send an email to [email protected].
26
Getting Started
Introduction
Whether at your point of sale, on your production line, or in your hospital or other healthcare facility, the DS4600
Series has a scanner that meets your needs; capture a wide range of barcodes and data, on different surfaces, in
different conditions, from different distances - all instantly and flawlessly. The DS4600 Series combines
performance with versatility, focusing on the task at hand without worrying about capturing data. With the right
DS4600 scanner for your environment, let the DS4608 capture your data.
Interfaces
The DS4608 scanner supports:
•
USB connection to a host. The scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface
type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming barcode menus.This interface supports
the international keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter Country Codes.
•
Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with
the host.
•
Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with
the IBM terminal.
•
Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. Scan barcode
menus to set up communication of the scanner with the host. This interface supports the international
keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter Country Codes.
Unpacking
Remove the digital scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged in transit,
contact support. See 26 for information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container; use this to
return the equipment for servicing.
27
Getting Started
Features
Figure 1
Parts of the Scanner
LED
Scan Window
Trigger
Setting Up the Scanner
Inserting the Interface Cable
NOTE: Different hosts require different cables. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples
only. Connectors vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1.
Insert the interface cable modular connector into the interface cable port on the rear of the digital scanner until
you hear a click. Low/medium/high beeps sound, indicating the scanner is operational.
28
Getting Started
Figure 2
Inserting the Cable
Cable Interface Port
Interface Cable Modular
Connector Clip
Interface Cable
Modular Connector
To Host
2.
Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is secure.
3.
Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter for information on host
connections).
Removing the Interface Cable
1.
Press the cable’s modular connector clip through the access slot in the digital scanner’s base.
Figure 3
Removing the Cable
2.
Carefully slide out the cable.
3.
Follow the steps for Inserting the Interface Cable to connect a new cable.
29
Getting Started
Connecting Power (if required)
If the host does not provide power to the digital scanner, connect an external power supply.
1.
Connect the interface cable to the base of the scanner, as described in Inserting the Interface Cable on page
28.
2.
Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port).
3.
Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into
an AC outlet.
Configuring the Scanner
To configure the scanner use the barcodes included in this manual or use the 123Scan configuration program. See
each host-specific chapter to set up a connection to a specific host type.
30
123Scan and Software
Tools
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner operation.
123Scan
123Scan is a software tool that simplifies scanner setup and more.
Intuitive enough for first time users, the 123Scan wizard guides users through a streamlined setup process.
Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be printed as a single programming barcode for scanning,
emailed to a smart phone for scanning from its screen, or downloaded to the scanner using a USB cable.
Through 123Scan a user can:
•
Configure a scanner using a wizard.
•
•
•
Program the following scanner settings.
•
Beeper tone / volume settings.
•
Enable / disable symbologies.
•
Communication settings.
Modify data before transmission to a host using:
•
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) - Scan one barcode per trigger pull.
•
Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) - Scan many barcodes in one trigger pull (select scanners).
•
Preferred Symbol - Single out one barcode on label of many (select scanners).
Load parameter settings to a scanner via the following.
•
•
Barcode scanning.
•
Scan a paper barcode.
•
Scan a barcode from a PC screen.
•
Scan a barcode from a smart phone screen.
Download over a USB cable.
•
Load settings to one scanner.
•
Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
31
123Scan and Software Tools
•
•
•
•
Validate scanner setup.
•
View scanned data within the utility's Data view screen.
•
Capture an image and save to a PC within the utility's Data view screen.
•
Review settings using the Parameter Report.
•
Clone settings from an already deployed scanner from the Start screen.
Upgrade scanner firmware.
•
Load settings to one scanner.
•
Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
View statistics such as:
•
Asset tracking information.
•
Time and usage information.
•
Barcodes scanned by symbology.
•
Battery diagnostics (select scanners).
Generate the following reports.
•
Barcode Report - Programming barcode, included parameter settings, and supported scanner models.
•
Parameter Report - Parameters programmed within a configuration file.
•
Inventory Report - Scanner asset tracking information.
•
Validation Report - Scanned data from the Data view.
•
Statistics Report - All statistics retrieved from the scanner.
For more information go to: http://www.zebra.com/123Scan.
Communication with 123Scan
Use a USB cable to connect the scanner to a Windows host computer running 123Scan.
123Scan Requirements
•
Host computer running Windows XP, 7, 8, and 10
•
Scanner
•
USB cable.
123Scan Information
For more information on123Scan, go to: http://www.zebra.com/123Scan
For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan, go to: http://www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos
To see a list of all of our software tools, go to: http://www.zebra.com/scannersoftware
32
123Scan and Software Tools
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos
Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools. Whether you need to simply
stage a device, or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset management,
these tools help you every step of the way.
To download any of the following free tools, go to: http://www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.
•
123Scan configuration utility
•
SDKs
•
•
•
•
Scanner SDK for Windows
•
Scanner SDK for Linux
•
Scanner SDK for Android
•
Scanner SDK for iOS
Drivers
•
OPOS driver
•
JPOS driver
•
USB CDC driver
•
TWAIN driver
Scanner Management Service (SMS) for Remote Management
•
Windows
•
Linux
How-To-Videos
NOTE: For a list of SDK supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication
Protocol Functionality.
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF)
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) allows customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF to edit
scanned data to suit the host application's requirements. With ADF you scan one barcode per trigger pull. ADF is
programmed using 123Scan.
For a video on Creating an Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rule using 123Scan, go to:
http://www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
For additional information, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
33
123Scan and Software Tools
Multicode Data Formatting (MDF)
Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) enables a 2D imaging scanner to scan all barcodes on a label with a single
trigger pull, and then modify and transmit the data to meet host application requirements. MDF supports
programming up to nine unique labels into one scanner. MDF also supports scanning multiple barcodes on
opposite sides of a box by holding the trigger.
Programming options include:
•
Output all or specific barcodes.
•
Control the barcode output sequence.
•
Apply unique multicode data formatting (MDF) to each output barcode.
•
Discard scanned data if all required barcodes are not present.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide,
p/n MN-002895-xx.
For a video on Creating an Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) Rule using 123Scan, go to:
www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
Preferred Symbol
Preferred Symbol is a barcode prioritization technique that enables favored decoding of high priority barcode(s).
The Preferred Symbol is the only barcode that is decoded and output within the preset Preferred Symbol Timeout.
During this time, the scanner attempts to decode the prioritized barcode and reports only this barcode.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide,
p/n MN-002895-xx.
To program Preferred Symbol via 123Scan, select 123Scan > Configuration Wizard > Symbologies screen, and
then select Preferred Symbol from the drop-down menu. Preferred Symbol programming is saved in the 123Scan
configuration file.
34
Data Capture
Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning barcodes, general instructions
and tips about scanning, and decode ranges.
Beeper Definitions
The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 3 defines beep
sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner.
Table 3
Beeper Definitions
Beeper Sequence
Indication
Standard Use
Low/medium/high beeps
Power up.
Short beep, tone
programmable
A barcode symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled).
4 long low beeps
Transmission error.
5 low beeps
Conversion or format error.
Low/low/low/extra low beeps
RS-232 receive error.
High beep
The digital scanner detected a <BEL> character over RS-232.
Parameter Menu Scanning
Low/high beeps
Input error; incorrect barcode, programming sequence, or Cancel scanned.
High/low beeps
Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using numeric barcodes.
High/low/high/low beeps
Successful program exit with change in parameter setting.
ADF Programming
Low/low beeps
Enter another alphabetic character or scan the End of Message barcode.
Low/high/high beeps
All rules are deleted.
Low/high/low/high beeps
Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again.
35
Data Capture
Table 3
Beeper Definitions (Continued)
Beeper Sequence
Indication
Low/high/low beeps
Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked
to exit rule entry.
Low/high beeps
Entry error, wrong barcode scanned, or criteria/action list is too long for a rule.
Re-enter criterion or action.
Low beep
Delete last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
High/high beeps
ADF criteria or action is expected. Enter another criterion or action, or scan the
Save Rule barcode.
High/low/low beeps
All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.
High/low/high/low beeps
Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
Macro PDF
2 low beeps
2 long low beeps
MPDF sequence buffered.
File ID error. A barcode not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
3 long low beeps
Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store the current MPDF
symbol.
4 long low beeps
Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D barcode in a MPDF sequence, a duplicate
MPDF label, a label in an incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or illegal
MPDF field.
5 long low beeps
Flushing MPDF buffer.
Low/high beeps
Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.
Fast warble beep
Aborting MPDF sequence.
Host Specific
USB only
Low/medium/high beeps
upon scanning a USB device
type
Communication with the host must be established before the digital scanner can
operate at the highest power level.
Low/medium/high beeps
occur more than once
The USB host can put the digital scanner in a state where power to the scanner
is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and usually happens when
the PC cold boots.
RS-232 only
1 short high beep
A <BEL> character is received and Beep on <BEL> is enabled.
36
Data Capture
LED Definitions
In addition to beep sequences, the digital scanner uses a two-color LED to indicate status. Table 4 defines LED
colors that display during scanning.
Table 4
Standard LED Definitions
LED
Indication
Hand-Held Scanning Standard Use
Green
A barcode was successfully decoded.
Red
Transmission error, conversion or format error, or RS-232 receive error.
Off
No power is applied to the digital scanner, or the scanner is on and ready to scan.
Fast Blinking Red
The scanner is disabled by a host command to the scanner.
Hands-Free (Presentation) Scanning Standard Use
Green
The scanner is on and ready to scan.
Momentarily Off
A barcode was successfully decoded.
Red
Transmission error, conversion or format error, or RS-232 receive error.
Off
No power is applied to the digital scanner, or the scanner is in low power mode.
Parameter Programming
Green
Number expected. Enter value using numeric barcodes.
Successful program exit with change in parameter setting.
Red
Input error: incorrect barcode, programming sequence, or Cancel scanned.
Firmware Update
Red, alternating
between solid and fast
blinking
Firmware download is completing (user should wait for this indicator to complete
before using the scanner). This indicator is followed by a low/medium/high power up
beep.
ADF Programming
Green
Enter another digit. Add leading zeros to the front if necessary.
Enter another alphabetic character or scan the End of Message barcode.
All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.
Delete last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
All rules deleted.
Blinking Green
Enter another criterion or action, or scan the Save Rule barcode.
Green after Blinking
Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked to
exit rule entry.
Red
Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again.
Entry error, wrong barcode scanned, or criteria/action list is too long for a rule.
Re-enter criterion or action.
37
Data Capture
Scanning
The DS4608 digital scanner is in hands-free (presentation) mode when it is placed in the gooseneck Intellistand. In
this mode, the digital scanner operates in continuous (constant-on) mode, where it automatically decodes a
barcode presented in its field of view.
When the digital scanner is not used for a user-definable period of time, it enters a low power mode in which the
LEDs are turned off or illumination blinks at a low duty cycle until the digital scanner detects an image change (e.g.
motion).
Scanning in Hands-Free (Presentation) Mode
The optional stand adds greater flexibility to DS4608 scanning operation. When the scanner is seated in the
stand’s “cup,” the scanner’s built-in sensor places the scanner in hands-free (presentation) mode. When the
scanner is removed from the stand, it automatically switches to its programmed hand-held triggered mode.
Assemble the Stand
To assemble the stand:
1.
Unscrew the wing nut from the bottom of the one piece scanner “cup.”
Figure 4
Assembling the Stand
One piece scanner
“cup” with flexible
“gooseneck”
Stand base
Wingnut
2.
Fit the bottom of the gooseneck piece into the opening on the top of the stand base.
3.
Tighten the wing nut underneath the base to secure the cup and neck piece to the base.
4.
Bend the neck to the desired position for scanning.
38
Data Capture
Mounting the Stand (optional)
You can attach the base of the scanner’s stand to a flat surface using two screws or double-sided tape (not
provided).
Figure 5
Mounting the Stand
Two screw-mount holes
Double-sided tape areas
(3 places)
dimensions = 1” x 2”)
Screw Mount
1.
Position the assembled base on a flat surface.
2.
Screw one #10 wood screw into each screw-mount hole until the base of the stand is secure (see Figure 5).
Tape Mount
1.
Peel the paper liner off one side of each piece of tape and place the sticky surface over each of the three
rectangular tape holders.
2.
Peel the paper liner off the exposed sides of each piece of tape and press the stand on a flat surface until it is
secure (see Figure 5).
Scanning with the Stand
When the digital scanner is placed in the gooseneck Intellistand it operates in continuous (constant-on) mode,
where it automatically decodes a barcode presented in its field of view.
To operate the scanner in the stand:
1.
Ensure the scanner is properly connected to the host (see the appropriate host chapter for information on host
connections).
2.
Insert the scanner in the gooseneck Intellistand by placing the front of the scanner into the stand’s “cup.”
39
Data Capture
Figure 6
Inserting the Scanner in the Gooseneck Intellistand
3.
Adjust the scan angle by bending the stand’s flexible “gooseneck” body.
4.
Present the barcode. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED momentarily shuts off. For
more information about beeper and LED definitions, see Table 3 and Table 4.
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
Pick up the digital scanner. The aiming dot displays.
1.
Ensure the aiming dot is centered on the barcode. See Aiming below
Figure 7
Centering the Aiming Dot on the Barcode
.
40
Data Capture
2.
Press and hold the trigger until either:
a.
The digital scanner reads the barcode. The digital scanner beeps, the LED flashes, and the aiming dot
turns off.
Or
b.
3.
The digital scanner does not read the barcode and the aiming dot turns off.
Release the trigger.
Aiming
When scanning, the digital scanner projects an LED dot which allows positioning the barcode within its field of
view. See Decode Ranges on page 42 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital scanner and a
barcode.
Figure 8
Aiming Dot
If necessary, the digital scanner turns on its illumination LEDs to illuminate the target barcode.
To scan a barcode, center the symbol and ensure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the
illumination LEDs.
Figure 9
Scanning Orientation with Aiming Dot
2D barcode
1D barcode
The digital scanner can also read a barcode presented within the aiming dot not centered. The top examples in
Figure show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.
Figure 10
Acceptable Aiming
41
Data Capture
Figure 11
Incorrect Aiming
The aiming dot is smaller when the digital scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the
symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the digital scanner, and those with larger
bars or elements (mil size) farther from the digital scanner.
The digital scanner beeps to indicate that it successfully decoded the barcode. For more information on beeper
and LED definitions, see Table 3 and Table 4.
Decode Ranges
Table 5
DS4608SR/DL/HD/HC Decode Ranges
Barcode
Type
Symbol
Density
DS4608SR/DL
Typical Working Ranges
DS4608HD/HC
Typical Working Ranges
Near
(in / cm)
Near
(in / cm)
Far
(in / cm)
Far
(in / cm)
Code 128
3.0 mil
2.7 / 6.8
5.4 / 13.7
1.7 / 4.3
5.0 / 12.7
Code 39
3.0 mil
2.2 / 5.5
5.4 / 13.7
1.3 / 3.3
6.0 / 15.2
5.0 mil
0.7 / 1.8
11.0 / 27.9
0.1 / 0.2
11.5 / 29.2
20.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
44.0 / 111.7
0.6 / 1.5
29.0 / 73.6
100% UPC
13.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
28.0 / 71.1
0.0 / 0.0
18.0 / 45.7
PDF417
6.6 mil
1.3 / 3.3
10.0 / 25.4
0.6 / 1.5
9.3 / 23.6
Data Matrix
5 mil
2.8 / 7.1
5.0 / 12.7
1.8 / 4.5
5.0 / 12.7
7.5 mil
2.0 / 5.0
8.5 / 21.5
1.0 / 2.5
8.0 / 20.3
10.0 mil
1.0 / 2.5
11.5 / 29.2
0.2 / 0.5
9.5 / 24.1
10.0 mil
1.0 / 2.5
9.0 / 22.8
0.2 / 0.5
8.5 / 21.5
20.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
17.5 / 44.4
0.0 / 0.0
13.5 / 34.3
QR Code
42
Data Capture
Table 6
DS4608-DPE Decode Ranges
Barcode Type
Code 128
DS4608-DPE
Typical Working Ranges
Symbol Density
Near
(in / cm)
Far
(in / cm)
2.0 mil
0.3 / 0.8
2.3 / 5.8
3.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
3.5 / 8.8
15 mil
4.2 / 10.7
8.6 / 21.8
2.0 mil
0.2 / 0.5
3.0 / 7.6
3.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
3.8 / 9.6
5.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
5.2 / 13.2
100% UPC
13.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
8.5 / 21.5
PDF417
4.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
3.3 / 8.4
5.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
3.8 / 9.6
6.6 mil
0.0 / 0.0
4.5 / 11.4
4.0 mil
0.2 / 0.5
2.8 / 7.1
5 mil
0.0 / 0.0
3.4 / 8.6
10.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
4.8 / 12.2
10.0 mil
0.0 / 0.0
4.5 / 11.4
Code 39
Data Matrix
QR Code
43
Maintenance, Troubleshooting,
& Technical Specifications
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested imaging scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and
signal descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
Known Harmful Ingredients
The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Zebra scanners and should not come in contact with
the device:
•
Acetone
•
Ammonia solutions
•
Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions
•
Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons
•
Benzene
•
Carbolic acid
•
Compounds of amines or ammonia
•
Ethanolamine
•
Ethers
•
Ketones
•
TB-lysoform
•
Toluene
•
Trichloroethylene.
Approved Cleaners for the Imaging Scanner
•
Isopropyl alcohol 70% (including pre-moistened wipes).
44
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Approved Disinfectant Cleaners for Healthcare Configurations of the DS4608
Scanners
Only use cleaning agents from the following lists and follow the manufacturer’s instructions, where applicable.
Cleaning Agents Containing Active Ingredients
•
Bleach 10% (Sodium Hypocgkirute 0.55%) and Water 90% Solution
•
Hydrogen Peroxide 3% and Water 97%
•
Mild Dish Soap
Brand Name Disinfectants
•
409® Glass and Surface Cleaner from Clorox
•
Clorox Healthcare® Bleach Germicidal Disinfectant Wipes
•
Dispatch® Wipes from Clorox
•
Sani-Cloth® Bleach Wipes
•
Windex® Blue, Windex® with Ammonia D and Windex® Cleansers: Antimicrobial from SC Johnson
Cleaning the Imaging Scanner
Routinely cleaning the exit window is required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. Do not allow any
abrasive material to touch the window.
To clean the scanner:
1.
Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre-moistened wipes.
2.
Gently wipe all surfaces, including the front, back, sides, top and bottom. Never apply liquid directly to the
scanner. Be careful not to let liquid pool around the scanner window, trigger, cable connector or any other area
on the device.
3.
Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing (use a cotton-tipped applicator to reach
tight or inaccessible areas).
4.
Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the exit window.
5.
Wipe the scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as
eyeglasses.
6.
Immediately dry the scanner window after cleaning with a soft non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking.
7.
Allow the unit to air dry before use.
8.
Scanner connectors:
a.
Dip the cotton portion of a cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol.
b.
Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the connector on the Zebra
scanner at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector.
c.
Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area.
d.
Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth
across the connectors at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connectors.
45
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Troubleshooting
NOTE: If after performing the possible solutions in Table 7 the imaging scanner still experiences problems, contact
the distributor or call support.
Table 7
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
The illumination does not
appear when pressing the
trigger.
No power to the imaging scanner.
If the configuration requires a power supply,
re-connect the power supply.
Incorrect host interface cable is
used.
Connect the correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose.
Re-connect cables.
Imaging scanner is disabled.
For IBM 468x and USB IBM hand-held, IBM
table-top, and OPOS modes, enable the
imaging scanner via the host interface.
Otherwise, see the technical person in
charge of scanning.
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode,
CTS is not asserted.
Assert CTS line.
Illumination is disabled.
Enable the illumination. See Decoding
Illumination on page 171.
Imaging scanner is not
programmed for the correct
barcode type.
Program the imaging scanner to read that
type of barcode. See Symbologies.
Barcode symbol is unreadable.
Scan test symbols of the same barcode type
to determine if the barcode is defaced.
The symbol is not completely
inside illumination.
Move the symbol completely within the
illumination.
Imaging scanner emits
illumination, but does not
decode the barcode.
Move the symbol completely within the field
of view (AIM pattern does NOT define FOV)
Distance between imaging
scanner and barcode is incorrect.
46
Move the scanner closer to or further from
the barcode. See Decode Ranges on page
42.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 7
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
Imaging scanner decodes
barcode, but does not
transmit the data to the
host.
Imaging scanner is not
programmed for the correct host
type.
Scan the appropriate host type programming
barcode. See the chapter corresponding to
the host type.
Interface cable is loose.
Re-connect the cable.
If the imaging scanner emits four
long low beeps, a transmission
error occurred.
Set the scanner's communication parameters
to match the host's setting.
This occurs if a unit is not properly
configured or connected to the
wrong host type.
Host displays scanned
data incorrectly.
If the imaging scanner emits 5 low
beeps, a conversion or format
error occurred.
Configure the imaging scanner's conversion
parameters properly.
If the imaging scanner emits
low/high/low beeps, it detected an
invalid ADF rule.
Program the correct ADF rules. Refer to the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer
Guide.
Imaging scanner is not
programmed to work with the
host.
Scan the appropriate host type programming
barcode.
For RS-232, set the imaging scanner's
communication parameters to match the
host's settings.
For a Keyboard Wedge configuration,
program the system for the correct keyboard
type, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key.
Program the proper editing options (e.g.,
UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).
Imaging scanner emits
short low/short
medium/short high beep
sequence (power-up beep
sequence) more than once.
The USB bus may put the imaging
scanner in a state where power to
the scanner is cycled on and off
more than once.
Normal during host reset.
Imaging scanner emits 4
short high beeps during
decode attempt.
Imaging scanner has not
completed USB initialization.
Wait several seconds and scan again.
Imaging scanner emits
Low/low/low/extra low
beeps when not in use.
RS-232 receive error.
Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the
imaging scanner's RS-232 parity to match
the host setting.
Imaging scanner emits
low/high beeps during
programming.
Input error, incorrect barcode or
Cancel barcode was scanned.
Scan the correct numeric barcodes within
range for the parameter programmed.
47
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 7
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem
Imaging scanner emits
low/high/low/high beeps
during programming.
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
Out of host parameter storage
space.
Scan Default Parameters on page 142.
Out of memory for ADF rules.
Reduce the number of ADF rules or the
number of steps in the ADF rules.
During programming, indicates
out of ADF parameter storage
space.
Erase all rules and re-program with shorter
rules.
ADF transmit error.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting
Guide for information.
Invalid ADF rule is detected.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting
Guide for information.
Imaging scanner emits a
power-up beep after
changing USB host type.
The USB bus re-established
power to the imaging scanner.
Normal when changing USB host type.
Imaging scanner emits one
high beep when not in use.
In RS-232 mode, a <BEL>
character was received and Beep
on <BEL> option is enabled.
Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled
and the imaging scanner is in RS-232 mode.
Imaging scanner emits
frequent beeps.
Incorrect host interface cable is
used.
Verify that the correct host interface cable is
used. If not, connect the correct host
interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose.
Check for loose cable connections and
re-connect cables.
Conversion or format error was
detected.
Ensure the scanner conversion parameters
are properly configured.
Imaging scanner emits
low/high/low beeps.
Imaging scanner emits five
long low beeps after a
barcode is decoded.
The scanner conversion
parameters are not properly
configured.
Conversion or format error was
detected.
Change the ADF rule, or change to a host
that can support the ADF rule.
An ADF rule was set up with
characters that can't be sent for
the host selected.
Conversion or format error was
detected.
A barcode was scanned with
characters that can't be sent for
that host.
48
Change the barcode, or change to a host that
can support the barcode.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Send Versions
Software Version
Scan the following barcode to send the version of software installed in the scanner.
Software Version
Serial Number
Scan the following barcode to send the scanner serial number to the host.
Serial Number
Manufacturing Information
Scan the following barcode to send the scanner manufacturing information to the host.
Manufacturing Information
49
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 8
Technical Specifications - DS4608-SR/DS4608-DL/DS4608-HD/DS4608-HL
Item
Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
6.5 in. H x 2.6 in. W x 3.9 in. D
16.5 cm H x 6.7 cm W x 9.8 cm D
Weight
5.7 oz. /161.9 g
Input Voltage Range
4.5 to 5.5 VDC Host Powered; 4.5 to 5.5 VDC External Power Supply
Operating Current at Nominal
Voltage (5.0V)
340 mA (typical)
Standby Current (Idle) at Nominal
Voltage (5.0V)
150 mA (typical)
Color
Nova White, Twilight Black
Supported Host Interfaces
USB, RS232, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS485
USB Certification
DS4608 is USB2.0 Full Speed Compliant, visit USB.org for more details.
Keyboard Support
Supports over 90 international keyboards
Electronic Article Surveillance
Compatible with Checkpoint EAS deactivation system
User Indicators
Direct Decode Indicator, Good Decode LEDs, rear view LEDs, beeper
(adjustable tone and volume)
Performance Characteristics
Light Source
Aiming Pattern: circular 617nm amber LED
Illumination
(2) 660nm Red LEDs
Imager Field of View
36.1° H x 22.6° V nominal
Image Sensor
1280 x 800 pixels
Minimum Print Contrast
15% minimum reflective difference
Skew Tolerance
+/- 60°
Pitch Tolerance
+/- 60°
Roll Tolerance
0°-360°
Imaging Characteristics
Graphics Format Support
Images can be exported as Bitmap, JPEG or TIFF
Image Quality
96PPI on an A4 document (DS4608-SR)
1 Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
50
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 8
Technical Specifications - DS4608-SR/DS4608-DL/DS4608-HD/DS4608-HL (Continued)
Item
Description
Environmental
Operating Temperature
32.0° to 122.0° F / 0.0° to 50.0° C
Storage Temperature
-40.0° to 158.0° F / -40.0° to 70.0° C
Humidity
5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Drop Specification
Designed to withstand multiple drops at 6.0 ft./1.8 m to concrete
Tumble Specification
Designed to withstand 2,000 tumbles in 1.5 ft./0.5 m tumbler
Environmental Sealing
IP52
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV Air, +/-8 KV Direct, +/-8 KV Indirect
Ambient Light Immunity
0 to 10,000 foot candles/0 to 107,000 Lux
Accessories
Gooseneck Intellistand, Cup
Symbol Decode Capability
1D
Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI Plessey,
UPC/EAN, I 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base 32 (Italian Pharma)
2D
PDF417, Micro PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec, DataMatrix,
MaxiCode, QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin, Postal Codes, SecurPharm,
DotCode, Dotted DataMatrix
OCR
OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR, US Currency
Minimum Element Resolution
Code 39 - 3.0 mil (DS4608-SR)
DataMatrix - 5.0 mil (DS4608-SR)
Code 39 - 2.0 mil (DS4608-HD)
DataMatrix - 4.0 mil (DS4608-HD)
DS4608-SR/DL Decode Ranges (Typical) 1
Symbology/Resolution
Near/Far
Code 39: 3 mil
2.2 in./5.6 cm to 5.4 in./13.7 cm
Code 39: 5 mil
0.7 in./1.8 cm to 11.0 in./27.9 cm
Code 39: 20 mil
0 in./0 cm to 44.0 in./111.8 cm
Code 128: 5 mil
2.7 in./6.9 cm to 5.4 in./13.7 cm
PDF 417: 6.7 mil
1.3 in./3.3 cm to 10.0 in./25.4 cm
UPC: 13 mil (100%)
0 in./0 cm to 28.0 in./71.1 cm
DataMatrix: 10 mil
1.0 in./2.5 cm to 11.5 in./29.2 cm
QR: 20 mil
0 in./0 cm to 17.5 in./44.5 cm
1 Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
51
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 8
Technical Specifications - DS4608-SR/DS4608-DL/DS4608-HD/DS4608-HL (Continued)
Item
Description
DS4608-HD/HL Decode Ranges (Typical) 1
Symbology/Resolution
Near/Far
Code 39: 3 mil
1.3 in./3.3 cm to 6.0 in./15.2 cm
Code 39: 5 mil
0 .1 in./0.3 cm to 11.5 in./29.2 cm
Code 39: 20 mil
0.6 in./1.5 cm to 29.0 in./73.7 cm
Code 128: 5 mil
1.7 in./4.3 cm to 5.0 in./12.7 cm
PDF 417: 6.7 mil
0.6 in./1.5 cm to 9.3 in./23.6 cm
UPC: 13 mil (100%)
0 in./0 cm to 18.0 in./45.7 cm
DataMatrix: 10 mil
0.2 in./0.5 cm to 9.5 in./24.1 cm
QR: 20 mil
0 in./0 cm to 13.5 in./34.3 cm
Utilities and Management
123Scan
Programs scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides scanned
barcode data and prints reports. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
www.zebra.com/123Scan
Symbol Scanner SDK
Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including documentation,
drivers, test utilities and sample source code.
www.zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows
Scanner Management Service
(SMS)
1
Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset information.
www.zebra.com/sms
Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
Table 9
Technical Specifications - DS4608-HC
Item
Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
6.5 in. H x 2.6 in. W x 3.9 in. D
16.5 cm H x 6.7 cm W x 9.8 cm D
Weight
5.7 oz. /161.9 g
Input Voltage Range
4.5 to 5.5 VDC Host Powered; 4.5 to 5.5 VDC External Power Supply
Operating Current at Nominal
Voltage (5.0V)
375 mA (typical)
Standby Current (Idle) at Nominal
Voltage (5.0V)
150 mA (typical)
Color
Healthcare White
Supported Host Interfaces
USB, RS232, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS485
1
Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
52
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 9
Technical Specifications - DS4608-HC (Continued)
Item
Description
USB Certification
DS4608 is USB2.0 Full Speed Compliant, visit USB.org for more details.
Keyboard Support
Supports over 90 international keyboards
User Indicators
Direct Decode Indicator, Good Decode LEDs, rear view LEDs, beeper
(adjustable tone and volume), haptic/vibration
Performance Characteristics
Light Source
Aiming Pattern: circular 528nm true green LED
Illumination
(2)warm white LEDs
Imager Field of View
35° H x 22° V nominal
Image Sensor
1280 x 800 pixels
Minimum Print Contrast
15% minimum reflective difference
Skew Tolerance
+/- 60°
Pitch Tolerance
+/- 60°
Roll Tolerance
0°- 360°
Imaging Characteristics
Graphics Format Support
Images can be exported as Bitmap, JPEG or TIFF
Environmental
Operating Temperature
32.0° to 122.0° F / 0.0° to 50.0° C
Storage Temperature
-40.0° to 158.0° F / -40.0° to 70.0° C
Humidity
5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Drop Specification
Designed to withstand multiple drops at 6.0 ft./1.8 m to concrete
Tumble Specification
Designed to withstand 2,000 tumbles in 1.5 ft./0.5 m tumbler
Environmental Sealing
IP52
Approved Cleaners
Disinfectant Ready. See Approved Disinfectant Cleaners for Healthcare
Configurations of the DS4608 Scanners on page 45.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV Air, +/-8 KV Direct, +/-8 KV Indirect
Ambient Light Immunity
0 to 10,000 foot candles/0 to 107,000 Lux
Accessories
Gooseneck Intellistand, Cup
1 Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
53
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 9
Technical Specifications - DS4608-HC (Continued)
Item
Description
Symbol Decode Capability
1D
Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI Plessey,
UPC/EAN, I 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base 32 (Italian Pharma)
2D
PDF417, Micro PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec, DataMatrix,
MaxiCode, QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin, Postal Codes, SecurPharm
OCR
OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR, US Currency
Minimum Element Resolution
Code 39 - 2.0 mil DataMatrix - 4.0 mil
DS4608-HC Decode Ranges (Typical) 1
Symbology/Resolution
Near/Far
Code 39: 3 mil
1.3 in./3.3 cm to 6.0 in./15.2 cm
Code 39: 5 mil
0.1 in./0.3 cm to 11.5 in./29.2 cm
Code 39: 20 mil
0.6 in./1.5 cm to 29.0 in./73.7 cm
Code 128: 5 mil
1.7 in./4.3 cm to 5.0 in./12.7 cm
PDF 417: 6.7 mil
0.6 in./1.5 cm to 9.3 in./23.6 cm
UPC: 13 mil (100%)
0 in./0 cm to 18.0 in./45.7 cm
DataMatrix: 10 mil
0.2 in./0.5 cm to 9.5 in./24.1 cm
QR: 20 mil
0 in./0 cm to 13.5 in./34.3 cm
Utilities and Management
123Scan
Programs scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides scanned
barcode data and prints reports. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
www.zebra.com/123Scan
Symbol Scanner SDK
Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including documentation,
drivers, test utilities and sample source code.
www.zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows
Scanner Management Service
(SMS)
1
Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset information.
www.zebra.com/sms
Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
54
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 10
Technical Specifications - DS4608-DPE
Item
Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
6.5 in. H x 2.6 in. W x 3.9 in. D
16.5 cm H x 6.7 cm W x 9.8 cm D
Weight
5.7 oz. /161.9 g
Input Voltage Range
4.5 to 5.5 VDC Host Powered; 4.5 to 5.5 VDC External Power Supply
Operating Current at Nominal
Voltage (5.0V)
375 mA (typical)
Standby Current (Idle) at Nominal
Voltage (5.0V)
150 mA (typical)
Color
Twilight Black
Supported Host Interfaces
USB, RS232, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS485
USB Certification
DS4608 is USB2.0 Full Speed Compliant, visit USB.org for more details.
Keyboard Support
Supports over 90 international keyboards
User Indicators
Direct Decode Indicator, Good Decode LEDs, rear view LEDs, beeper
(adjustable tone and volume), haptic/vibration
Performance Characteristics
Light Source
Aiming Pattern: circular 528nm true green LED
Illumination
(2) warm white LEDs
Imager Field of View
34° H x 21.6° V nominal
Image Sensor
1280 x 800 pixels
Minimum Print Contrast
15% minimum reflective difference
Skew Tolerance
+/- 60°
Pitch Tolerance
+/- 60°
Roll Tolerance
0°- 360°
Imaging Characteristics
Graphics Format Support
Images can be exported as Bitmap, JPEG or TIFF
Environmental
Operating Temperature
32.0° to 122.0° F / 0.0° to 50.0° C
Storage Temperature
-40.0° to 158.0° F / -40.0° to 70.0° C
1 Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
55
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 10
Technical Specifications - DS4608-DPE (Continued)
Item
Description
Humidity
5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Drop Specification
Designed to withstand multiple drops at 6.0 ft./1.8 m to concrete
Tumble Specification
Designed to withstand 2,000 tumbles in 1.5 ft./0 .5 m tumbler
Environmental Sealing
IP52
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV Air, +/-8 KV Direct, +/-8 KV Indirect
Ambient Light Immunity
0 to 10,000 Foot Candles / 0 to 107,600 Lux
Accessories
Gooseneck Intellistand, Cup
Symbol Decode Capability
1D
Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI Plessey,
UPC/EAN, I 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base 32 (Italian Pharma)
2D
PDF417, Micro PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec, DataMatrix,
DotCode, Dotted DataMatrix, MaxiCode, QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin,
Postal Codes, SecurPharm
Minimum Element Resolution
Code 39 - 2.0 mil DataMatrix - 4.0 mil
DS4608-HC Decode Ranges (Typical) 1
Symbology/Resolution
Near/Far
Code 128: 2 mil
0.3 in./0.8 cm to 2.3 in./5.8 cm
Code 128: 3 mil
0 in./0 cm to 3.5 in./8.8 cm
Code 128: 15 mil
4.2 in./10.7 cm to 8.6 in./21.8 cm
Code 39: 2 mil
0.2 in./0.5 cm to 3.0 in./7.6 cm
Code 39: 3 mil
0 in./0 cm to 3.8 in./9.6 cm
Code 39: 5 mil
0 in./0 cm to 5.2 in./13.2 cm
PDF 417: 4 mil
0 in./0 cm to 3.3 in./8.4 cm
PDF 417: 5 mil
0 in./0 cm to 3.8 in./9.6 cm
PDF 417: 6.6 mil
0 in./0 cm to 4.5 in./11.4 cm
UPC: 13 mil (100%)
0 in./0 cm to 8.5 in./21.5 cm
Data Matrix: 4 mil
0.2 in./0.5 cm to 2.8 in./7.1 cm
Data Matrix: 5 mil
0 in./0 cm to 3.4 in./8.6 cm
Data Matrix: 10 mil
0 in./0 cm to 4.8 in./12.2 cm
QR Code: 10 mil
0 in./0 cm to 4.5 in./11.4 cm
Utilities and Management
1
Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
56
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 10
Technical Specifications - DS4608-DPE (Continued)
Item
123Scan
Description
Programs scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides scanned
barcode data and prints reports. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
www.zebra.com/123Scan
Symbol Scanner SDK
Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including documentation,
drivers, test utilities and sample source code.
www.zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows
Scanner Management Service
(SMS)
Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset information.
www.zebra.com/sms
1 Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent
Imaging Scanner Signal Descriptions
Figure 12
Imaging Scanner Cable Pinouts
Bottom of
scanner
Cable interface port
PIN 10
PIN 1
Interface cable
modular connector
The signal descriptions in Table 11 apply to the connectors on the DS4608 imaging scanner and are for reference
only.
57
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications
Table 11
DS4608 Imaging Scanner Signal Pin-outs
Pin
IBM
RS-232
Keyboard Wedge
USB
1
Cable ID
Cable ID
Cable ID
Cable ID
2
Power (+5V)
Power (+5V)
Power (+5V)
Power (+5V)
3
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
4
IBM_OUT
TxD
KeyClock
Reserved
5
IBM_IN
RxD
TermData
D+
6
IBM_T/R
RTS
KeyData
Reserved
7
Reserved
CTS
TermClock
D-
8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
9
See note
10
See note
Note: EAS configurations use pins 9 and 10 for an EAS antenna. For other configurations pins 9 and 10 are
open.
58
USB Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host. The scanner connects directly to a USB host, or
a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 12 on page 61 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the USB keystroke delay to
medium, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under USB Keystroke Delay on page 65. The scanner
issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
59
USB Interface
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Connecting a USB Interface
Figure 13
USB Connection
USB Series A
shielded connector
Interface cable
NOTE: When connecting via USB use the shielded connector cable (e.g., p/n CBA-U21-S07ZAR). Refer to
Solution Builder for guidance about cables.
The scanner connects to USB-capable hosts including:
•
TGCS (IBM) terminals
•
Apple ™ desktop and notebooks
•
Other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the scanner through USB:
•
Windows® XP, 7, 8, 10
•
MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.6
•
IBM 4690 OS.
The scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts that support USB Human Interface Devices (HID).
To set up the scanner:
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 13 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are
the same.
60
USB Interface
1.
Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 28.
2.
Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of
the IBM SurePOS terminal.
3.
The scanner automatically detects the host and uses the default USB device type. If the default (*) does not
meet your requirements, select another USB device type by scanning the appropriate barcode from USB
Device Type on page 62.
4.
On first installation when using Windows, the software may prompt to select or install the Human Interface
Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next at all choices and click Finished on the
last choice. The scanner powers up during this installation.
5.
To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 46.
USB Parameter Defaults
Table 12 lists defaults for USB host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 12
USB Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Default
Page Number
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
USB HID Keyboard
62
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking
Enable
64
USB Keystroke Delay
No Delay
65
USB Caps Lock Override
Do Not Override (Disable)
65
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Send Barcodes with Unknown
Characters
66
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39
Disable
66
USB Fast HID
Enable
67
USB Polling Interval
3 msec
68
Keypad Emulation
Enable
70
Quick Keypad Emulation
Enable
70
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Enable
71
USB FN1 Substitution
Disable
71
Function Key Mapping
Disable
72
61
USB Interface
Table 12
USB Interface Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Default
Page Number
Simulated Caps Lock
Disable
72
Convert Case
None
73
USB Static CDC
Enable
74
CDC Beep on <BEL>
Enable
74
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep
Honor
75
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
Ignore
75
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive
Ignore
76
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Version 2.2
76
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the USB device type. To select a country keyboard type for the USB
HID Keyboard host, see Country Codes.
NOTES
•
When changing USB Device Types, the scanner resets and issues the standard startup beep
sequences.
•
When connecting two scanners to a host, IBM does not allow selecting two of the same device type. If
you require two connections, select IBM Table-top USB for one scanner and IBM Hand-held USB for
the second scanner.
•
Select IBM Hand-held USB to transmit data only once when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable
command. If the register issues a Scan Enable command before the timeout expires, scanning can
continue. If a Scan Enable does not occur within the timeout, the scanner issues 4 long low transmission
error beeps, and data does not transmit. You can then scan again under the same criteria.
Select OPOS (IBM Hand-held with Full Disable) to completely shut off the scanner when an IBM
register issues a Scan Disable command, including aim, illumination, decoding, and data transmission.
•
Before selecting USB CDC Host, install the Zebra USB CDC driver located at
https://www.zebra.com/us/en/support-downloads/software/drivers/usb-cdc-driver.html on the host.
•
If using Windows XP, this self-contained driver provides functionality but prompts with a warning
message as Microsoft no longer re-certifies drivers for this operating system.
•
Windows 10 includes a native CDC driver that supports Zebra scanners. Use this to provide CDC
functionality in the Windows 10 environment.
To recover a stalled scanner:
Install the Zebra USB CDC driver, or,
After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the scanner to power up using an
alternate USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type.
•
To select the Toshiba TEC device type, refer to the Toshiba TEC Programmer’s Guide.
62
USB Interface
USB Device Type (continued)
*USB HID Keyboard
IBM Table-top USB
IBM Hand-held USB
OPOS
(IBM Hand-held with Full Disable)
63
USB Interface
USB Device Type (continued)
USB CDC Host
SSI over USB CDC
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging
Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking
After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to
enable or disable status handshaking.
*Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking
Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking
64
USB Interface
USB Keystroke Delay
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Select a longer
delay for hosts that require slower data transmission.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
USB Caps Lock Override
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard device. Scan Override Caps Lock Key to preserve the case of
the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows
(ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.
Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable)
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
65
USB Interface
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard and IBM devices. Unknown characters are characters the host
does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send all barcode data except for
unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters for IBM devices to prevent sending barcodes
containing at least one unknown character to the host, or for USB HID Keyboard devices to send the barcode
characters up to the unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39
This option applies only to the IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following
barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
66
USB Interface
USB Fast HID
Scan Enable USB Fast HID to transmit USB HID data at a faster rate.
NOTE: Disable this if there are problems with transmission.
*Enable USB Fast HID
Disable USB Fast HID
67
USB Interface
USB Polling Interval
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the polling interval, which is the rate at which data transmits between the
scanner and host computer. A lower number indicates a faster data rate.
NOTE: When changing the USB polling interval, the scanner restarts and issues a power-up beep sequence.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the host supports the selected data rate.
1 msec
2 msec
*3 msec
4 msec
5 msec
68
USB Interface
USB Polling Interval (continued)
6 msec
7 msec
8 msec
9 msec
10 msec
69
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad.
For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.
NOTE: If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes on page 491),
disable Quick Keypad Emulation and enable Keypad Emulation.
*Enable Keypad Emulation
Disable Keypad Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard device when Keypad Emulation is enabled. Scan Enable Quick
Keypad Emulation for a quicker method of emulation using the numeric keypad where ASCII sequences are only
sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard.
*Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
70
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad
as ISO characters which have a leading zero. For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT MAKE” 0 0 6 5 “ALT
BREAK”.
*Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard device. Scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution to
replace any FN1 character in a GS1 128 barcode with a user-selected Key Category and value.
See FN1 Substitution Values on page 183 to set the Key Category and Key Value.
Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
*Disable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
71
USB Interface
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequence (see Table 38 on page 471). Scan Enable
Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not
have a bold equivalent remain the same regardless of whether you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Simulated Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock
state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.
NOTE: Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.
Do not enable this if USB Caps Lock Override on page 65 is enabled.
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock
72
USB Interface
Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE: Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
*No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to Lower Case
73
USB Interface
USB Static CDC
When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1,
second device = COM2, third device = COM3, etc.)
When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.
*Enable USB Static CDC
Disable USB Static CDC
CDC Beep on <BEL>
If you enable this parameter, the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character in USB CDC
communications. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
*Enable CDC Beep on <BEL>
Disable CDC Beep on <BEL>
74
USB Interface
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep
The host can send a direct I/O beep request to the scanner. If you select Ignore Direct I/O Beep, the scanner
does not sound beeps on this command. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were
processed.
*Honor Direct I/O Beep
(1)
Ignore Direct I/O Beep
(0)
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
The host can send a beeper configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the
scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were
processed.
Honor Beep Directive
*Ignore Beep Directive
75
USB Interface
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive
The host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to prevent the
scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were
processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
*Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Select IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original) to send the following code types as Unknown:
•
Data Matrix
•
GS1 Data Matrix
•
QR Code
•
GS1 QR
•
MicroQR Code
•
Aztec
Select IBM Specification Level Version 2.2 to send the code types with the appropriate IBM identifiers.
IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original)
*IBM Specification Level Version 2.2
76
USB Interface
ASCII Character Sets
See ASCII Character Sets for the following information:
•
ASCII Character Set on page 471
•
ALT Key Character Set on page 476
•
GUI Key Character Set on page 477
•
PF Key Character Set on page 478
•
F Key Character Set on page 479
•
Numeric Key Character Set on page 480
•
Extended Key Character Set on page 480
77
SSI Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a
communications link between Zebra decoders (e.g., scan engines, slot scanners, hand-held scanners,
two-dimensional scanners, hands-free scanners, and RF base stations) and a serial host. It provides the means for
the host to control the decoder or scanner.
Communication
All communication between the scanner and host occurs over the hardware interface lines using the SSI protocol.
Refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx, for more information on SSI.
The host and the scanner exchange messages in packets. A packet is a collection of bytes framed by the proper
SSI protocol formatting bytes. The maximum number of bytes per packet that the SSI protocol allows for any
transaction is 257 (255 bytes + 2 byte checksum).
Depending on the configuration, the scanner can send decode data as ASCII data (unpacketed), or as part of a
larger message (packeted).
SSI performs the following functions for the host device:
•
Maintains a bi-directional interface with the scanner
•
Allows the host to send commands that control the scanner
•
Passes data from the scanner to a host device in SSI packet format or straight decode message.
The SSI environment consists of a scanner, a serial cable which attaches to the host device, and if required, a
power supply.
SSI transmits all decode data including special formatting (e.g., AIM ID). Parameter settings can control the format
of the transmitted data.
The scanner can also send parameter information, product identification information, or event codes to the host.
All commands sent between the scanner and host must use the format described in the SSI Message Formats
section. SSI Transactions on page 80 describes the required sequence of messages in specific cases.
78
SSI Interface
SSI Commands
Table 13 lists all the SSI opcodes the scanner supports. The host transmits opcodes designated type H. The
scanner (decoder) transmits type D opcodes, and either can transmit Host/Decoder (H/D) types.
Table 13
SSI Commands
Name
Type
Opcode
Description
AIM_OFF
H
0xC4
Deactivate aiming pattern.
AIM_ON
H
0xC5
Activate aiming pattern.
BEEP
H
0xE6
Sound the beeper.
CAPABILITIES_REPLY
D
0xD4
Reply to CAPABILITIES_REQUEST; contains a list of the
capabilities and commands the decoder supports.
CAPABILITIES_REQUEST
H
0xD3
Request capabilities report from the decoder.
CMD_ACK
H/D
0xD0
Positive acknowledgment of received packet.
CMD_NAK
H/D
0xD1
Negative acknowledgment of received packet.
DECODE_DATA
D
0xF3
Decode data in SSI packet format.
EVENT
D
0xF6
Event indicated by associated event code.
LED_OFF
H
0xE8
De-activate LED output.
LED_ON
H
0xE7
Activate LED output.
PARAM_DEFAULTS
H
0xC8
Set parameter default values.
PARAM_REQUEST
H
0xC7
Request values of certain parameters.
PARAM_SEND
H/D
0xC6
Send parameter values.
REPLY_REVISION
D
0xA4
Reply to REQUEST_REVISION, contains the decoder's
software/hardware configuration.
REQUEST_REVISION
H
0xA3
Request the decoder's configuration.
SCAN_DISABLE
H
0xEA
Prevent the operator from scanning barcodes.
SCAN_ENABLE
H
0xE9
Permit barcode scanning.
SLEEP
H
0xEB
Request to place the decoder into low power.
START_DECODE
H
0xE4
Tell the decoder to attempt to decode a barcode.
STOP_DECODE
H
0xE5
Tell the decoder to abort a decode attempt.
WAKEUP
H
N/A
Wake the decoder from low power mode.
For details of the SSI protocol, refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide.
79
SSI Interface
SSI Transactions
General Data Transactions
ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking (the default), all packeted messages must have a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK
response, unless the command description states otherwise. Zebra recommends leaving this handshaking
enabled to provide feedback to the host. Raw decode data and WAKEUP do not use ACK/NAK handshaking since
they are not packeted data.
Following is an example of a problem which can occur if you disable ACK/NAK handshaking:
•
The host sends a PARAM_SEND message to the scanner to change the baud rate from 9600 to 19200.
•
The scanner cannot interpret the message.
•
The scanner does not implement the change the host requested.
•
The host assumes that the parameter change occurred and acts accordingly.
•
Communication is lost because the change did not occur on both sides.
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, the following occurs:
•
The host sends a PARAM_SEND message.
•
The scanner cannot interpret the message.
•
The scanner CMD_NAKs the message.
•
The host resends the message.
•
The scanner receives the message successfully, responds with CMD_ACK, and implements parameter
changes.
80
SSI Interface
Decoded Data Transmission
The Decode Data Packet Format parameter controls how decode data is sent to the host. Set this parameter to
send the data in a DECODE_DATA packet. Clear this parameter to transmit the data as raw ASCII data.
NOTE: When transmitting decode data as raw ASCII data, ACK/NAK handshaking does not apply regardless of
the state of the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter.
ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data
The scanner sends a DECODE_DATA message after a successful decode. The scanner waits for a programmable
timeout for a CMD_ACK response. If it does not receive the response, the scanner tries to send two more times
before issuing a host transmission error. If the scanner receives a CMD_NAK from the host, it may attempt a retry
depending on the cause field of the CMD_NAK message.
(1)
DECODE_DATA
Decoder
Data is captured
by decoder
Host
(2)
CMD_ACK
message sent
ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
Even if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled, no handshaking occurs because handshaking applies only to packeted
data. In this example the packeted_decode parameter is disabled.
Decoder
Data is
captured by
decoder
ASCII data
Host
81
SSI Interface
ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA
In this example ACK/NAK does not occur even though packeted_decode is enabled because the ACK/NAK
handshaking parameter is disabled.
Decoder
(1)
Data is
captured by
decoder
DECODE_DATA
Host
message sent
ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
The decoder sends captured data to the host.
Decoder
(1)
Data is
captured by
decoder
ASCII data sent
Host
82
SSI Interface
Communication Summary
RTS/CTS Lines
All communication must use RTS/CTS handshaking as described in the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s
Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx. If bypassing hardware handshaking, the host must send the WAKEUP command before
all other communication or the first byte of a message can be lost during the scanner wakeup sequence. Zebra
recommends not bypassing RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.
ACK/NAK Option
ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled by default and Zebra recommends leaving it enabled. Disabling this can cause
communication problems, as handshaking is the only acknowledgment that a message was received correctly.
ACK/NAK is not used with unpacketed decode data regardless of whether it is enabled.
Number of Data Bits
All communication with the scanner must use 8-bit data.
Serial Response Timeout
The Host Serial Response Timeout parameter determines how long to wait for a handshaking response before
trying again or aborting further attempts. Set the same value for both the host and scanner.
NOTE: You can temporarily change the Host Serial Response Timeout when the host takes longer to process
an ACK or longer data string. Zebra does not recommend frequent permanent changes due to limited
write cycles of non-volatile memory.
Retries
The host resends data twice after the initial send if the scanner does not respond with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK
handshaking is enabled), or response data (e.g., PARAM_SEND, REPLY_REVISION). If the scanner replies with a
NAK RESEND, the host resends the data. All resent messages must have the resend bit set in the Status byte.
The scanner resends data two times after the initial send if the host fails to reply with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK
handshaking is enabled).
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you use PARAM_SEND to change these serial parameters, the ACK response to the PARAM_SEND uses the
previous values for these parameters. The new values then take effect for the next transaction.
Errors
The scanner issues a communication error when:
•
The CTS line is asserted when the scanner tries to transmit, and is still asserted on each of two successive
retries
•
The scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK after initial transmit and two resends.
83
SSI Interface
SSI Communication Notes
•
When not using hardware handshaking, space messages sufficiently apart. The host must not
communicate with the scanner if the scanner is transmitting.
•
When using hardware handshaking, frame each message properly with handshaking signals. Do not try to
send two commands within the same handshaking frame.
•
There is a permanent/temporary bit in the PARAM_SEND message. Removing power from the scanner
discards temporary changes. Permanent changes are written to non-volatile memory. Frequent changes
shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI
Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 156 provides options to select a general time delay. To program a more
specific delay value, use an SSI command according to Table 14.
Table 14
Value
Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power
Timeout
Value
Timeout
Value
Timeout
Value
Timeout
0x00
15 Min
0x10
1 Sec
0x20
1 Min
0x30
1 Hour
0x01
30 Min
0x11
1 Sec
0x21
1 Min
0x31
1 Hour
0x02
60 Min
0x12
2 Sec
0x22
2 Min
0x32
2 Hours
0x03
90 Min
0x13
3 Sec
0x23
3 Min
0x33
3 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x14
4 Sec
0x24
4 Min
0x34
4 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x15
5 Sec
0x25
5 Min
0x35
5 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x16
6 Sec
0x26
6 Min
0x36
6 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x17
7 Sec
0x27
7 Min
0x37
7 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x18
8 Sec
0x28
8 Min
0x38
8 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x19
9 Sec
0x29
9 Min
0x39
9 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1A
10 Sec
0x2A
10 Min
0x3A
10 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1B
15 Sec
0x2B
15 Min
0x3B
15 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1C
20 Sec
0x2C
20 Min
0x3C
20 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1D
30 Sec
0x2D
30 Min
0x3D
30 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1E
45 Sec
0x2E
45 Min
0x3E
45 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1F
60 Sec
0x2F
60 Min
0x3F
60 Hours
CAUTION: With hardware handshaking disabled, the scanner wakes from low power mode upon receiving a
character. However, the scanner does not process this character or any others it receives during the
10 ms period following wakeup. Wait at least 10 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.
84
SSI Interface
Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI
The SSI protocol allows the host to send a command that is variable in length up to 255 bytes. Although there is a
provision in the protocol to multi-packet commands from the host, the scanner does not support this. The host must
fragment packets using the provisions in the RSM protocol.
Command Structure
Table 15
Byte
Command Structure
7
6
5
4
3
0
Length (not including the checksum)
1
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2
Message Source (4 - Host)
3
Reserved (0)
4
Payload data (see the following example)
Reserved (0)
2
1
0
Reserved (0)
Cont'd packet
Retransmit
...
Length -1
Length
2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1
2's complement checksum (LSB)
The expected positive response is SSI_MGMT_COMMAND which can be a multi-packet response. Devices that do
not support this command respond with the standard SSI_NAK.
Response Structure
Table 16
Byte
Response Structure
7
6
5
4
3
0
Length (not including the checksum)
1
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2
Message Source (0 - Decoder)
3
Reserved (0)
4
Payload data (see the following example)
Reserved (0)
...
Length -1
Length
2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1
2's complement checksum (LSB)
85
2
1
0
Reserved (0)
Cont'd packet
Retransmit
SSI Interface
Example Transaction
The following example illustrates how to retrieve diagnostic information (Diagnostic Testing and Reporting
(Attribute #10061) decimal) from the scanner using encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI. Before sending an
RSM command, the host must send the RSM Get Packet Size command to query the packet size supported by the
device.
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device
0A 80 04 00 00 06 20 00 FF FF FD 4E
Where:
•
0A 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header
•
00 06 20 00 FF FF is RSM Get Packet Size command
•
FD 4E is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Packet Size Information
0C 80 00 00 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 FD 6C
Where:
•
0C 80 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM command over SSI command header
•
00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 is RSM Get Packet Size response
•
FD 6C is SSI response checksum
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information
0C 80 04 00 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 FE B0
Where:
•
0C 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header
•
00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 is attribute Get command requesting attribute 10061 decimal
•
FE B0 is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Diagnostic Information
21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 FF FF FC 15
Where:
•
21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM responses over SSI
command header
•
00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 is attribute Get response which includes diagnostic report
value
•
FF FF is attribute Get response, packet termination
•
FC 15 is SSI response checksum
86
SSI Interface
Setting Parameters
This section describes how to set up the scanner with an SSI host. When using SSI, program the scanner via
barcode menu or SSI hosts commands.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 17 on page 88 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan
the Baud Rate 19,200 barcode under Baud Rate on page 89. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED
turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
87
SSI Interface
Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults
Table 13 lists defaults for SSI host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Download data through the device’s serial port using SSI. Hexadecimal parameter numbers appear in this
chapter below the parameter title, and option values appear in parenthesis beneath the accompanying
barcodes. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s Guide for detailed instructions for
changing parameters using this method.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 17
SSI Interface Default Table
Parameter
Number
SSI Number
Select SSI Host
N/A
N/A
N/A
89
Baud Rate
156
9Ch
9600
89
Parity
158
9Eh
None
91
Check Parity
151
97h
Disable
91
Stop Bits
157
9Dh
1
92
Software Handshaking
159
9Fh
Enable ACK/NAK
93
Host RTS Line State
154
9Ah
Low
94
Decode Data Packet Format
238
EEh
Send Raw Decode Data
94
Host Serial Response Timeout
155
9Bh
2 Seconds
95
Host Character Timeout
239
EFh
200 msec
96
Multipacket Option
334
F0h 4Eh
Option 1
97
Interpacket Delay
335
F0h 4Fh
0 msec
98
Decode Event
256
F0h 00h
Disable
99
Boot Up Event
258
F0h 02h
Disable
100
Parameter Event
259
F0h 03h
Disable
100
Parameter
Default
Page
Number
SSI Host Parameters
Event Reporting
NOTE: SSI interprets Prefix, Suffix1, and Suffix2 values listed in Table 38 on page 471 differently than other
interfaces. SSI does not recognize key categories, only the 3-digit decimal value. The default value of
7013 is interpreted as CR only.
88
SSI Interface
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
To select SSI as the host interface, scan the following barcode.
SSI Host
Baud Rate
Parameter # 156
SSI # 9Ch
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the
scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host
device or may reach it in distorted form.
*Baud Rate 9600
(6)
Baud Rate 19,200
(7)
Baud Rate 38,400
(8)
89
SSI Interface
Baud Rate (continued)
Baud Rate 57,600
(10)
Baud Rate 115,200
(11)
Baud Rate 230,400
(13)
Baud Rate 460,800
(14)
Baud Rate 921,600
(15)
90
SSI Interface
Parity
Parameter # 158
SSI # 9Eh
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to
select the parity type according to host device requirements:
•
Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
odd number of 1 bits.
•
Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains
an even number of 1 bits.
•
None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
(2)
Even
(1)
*None
(0)
Check Parity
Parameter # 151
SSI # 97h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to check the parity of received characters. See Parity to
select the type of parity.
*Do Not Check Parity
(0)
Check Parity
(1)
91
SSI Interface
Stop Bits
Parameter # 157
SSI # 9Dh
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and
prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes
to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
*1 Stop Bit
(1)
2 Stop Bits
(2)
92
SSI Interface
Software Handshaking
Parameter # 159
SSI # 9Fh
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to the control hardware handshaking offers.
Hardware handshaking is always enabled; you cannot disable it.
Options:
•
Disable ACK/NAK Handshaking - The scanner neither generates nor expects ACK/NAK handshaking
packets.
•
Enable ACK/NAK Handshaking - After transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK
response from the host. The scanner also ACKs or NAKs messages from the host.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If
the scanner does not get a response in this time, it resends its data up to two times before discarding the
data and declaring a transmission error.
Disable ACK/NAK
(0)
*Enable ACK/NAK
(1)
93
SSI Interface
Host RTS Line State
Parameter # 154
SSI # 9Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the expected idle state of the Serial Host RTS line.
The SSI interface is used with host applications which also implement the SSI protocol. However, you can use the
scanner in a "scan-and-transmit" mode to communicate with any standard serial communication software on a host
PC (see Decode Data Packet Format on page 94). If transmission errors occur in this mode, the host PC may be
asserting hardware handshaking lines which interfere with the SSI protocol. Scan the High barcode to address this
problem.
*Low
(0)
High
(1)
Decode Data Packet Format
Parameter # 238
SSI # EEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit decoded data in raw format (unpacketed), or with
the packet format defined by the serial protocol.
Selecting the raw format disables ACK/NAK handshaking for decode data.
*Send Raw Decode Data
(0)
Send Packeted Decode Data
(1)
94
SSI Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout
Parameter # 155
SSI # 9Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK before resending.
Also, if the scanner wants to send, and the host has already been granted permission to send, the scanner waits
for the designated timeout before declaring an error.
NOTE: Other values are available via SSI command.
*Low - 2 Seconds
(20)
Medium - 5 Seconds
(50)
High - 7.5 Seconds
(75)
Maximum - 9.9 Seconds
(99)
95
SSI Interface
Host Character Timeout
Parameter # 239
SSI # EFh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the maximum time the scanner waits between characters transmitted
by the host before discarding the received data and declaring an error.
NOTE: Other values are available via SSI command.
*Low - 200 msec
(20)
Medium - 500 msec
(50)
High - 750 msec
(75)
Maximum - 990 msec
(99)
96
SSI Interface
Multipacket Option
Parameter # 334
SSI # F0h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to control ACK/NAK handshaking for multi-packet transmissions:
•
Multi-Packet Option 1 - The host sends an ACK/NAK for each data packet during a multi-packet
transmission.
•
Multi-Packet Option 2 - The scanner sends data packets continuously, with no ACK/NAK handshaking to
pace the transmission. The host, if overrun, can use hardware handshaking to temporarily delay scanner
transmissions. At the end of transmission, the scanner waits for a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK.
•
Multi-Packet Option 3 - This is the same as option 2 with the addition of a programmable interpacket
delay. See Interpacket Delay on page 98 to set this delay.
*Multipacket Option 1
(0)
Multipacket Option 2
(1)
Multipacket Option 3
(2)
97
SSI Interface
Interpacket Delay
Parameter # 335
SSI # F0h 4Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the interpacket delay if you selected Multipacket Option 3.
NOTE: Other values are available via SSI command.
*Minimum - 0 msec
(0)
Low - 25 msec
(25)
Medium - 50 msec
(50)
High - 75 msec
(75)
Maximum - 99 msec
(99)
98
SSI Interface
Event Reporting
The host can request the scanner to provide certain information (events) relative to scanner behavior. Scan the
following barcodes to enable or disable the events listed in Table 18 and on the following pages.
Table 18
Event Codes
Event Class
Event
Code Reported
Decode Event
Non-parameter decode
0x01
Boot Up Event
System power-up
0x03
Parameter Event
Parameter entry error
0x07
Parameter stored
0x08
Defaults set (and parameter event is enabled by default)
0x0A
Number expected
0x0F
Decode Event
Parameter # 256
SSI # F0h 00h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Decode Event.
•
Enable Decode Event - The scanner generates a message to the host upon a successful barcode
decode.
•
Disable Decode Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Decode Event
(1)
*Disable Decode Event
(0)
99
SSI Interface
Boot Up Event
Parameter # 258
SSI # F0h 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Boot Up Event:
•
Enable Boot Up Event - The scanner generates a message to the host whenever power is applied.
•
Disable Boot Up Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Boot Up Event
(1)
*Disable Boot Up Event
(0)
Parameter Event
Parameter # 259
SSI # F0h 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Parameter Event:
•
Enable Parameter Event - The scanner generates a message to the host when one of the events
specified in Table 18 on page 99 occurs.
•
Disable Parameter Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Parameter Event
(1)
*Disable Parameter Event
(0)
100
RS-232 Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host. The scanner uses the RS-232 interface to
connect to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port).
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 19 on page 103 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
If your host does not appear in Table 20, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication
parameters to match the host.
NOTE: The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system
architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Zebra offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C
conversion. Contact support for more information.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
101
Feature/option
RS-232 Interface
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan
the Baud Rate 19,200 barcode under Baud Rate on page 109. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the
LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Connecting an RS-232 Interface
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Figure 14
RS-232 Connection
Serial port
connector to host
Interface cable
Power supply
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated
in Figure 14, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1.
Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 28.
2.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.
3.
If required, connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power
supply into an appropriate outlet.
102
RS-232 Interface
4.
The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does
not meet your requirements, select another RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate barcode from
RS-232 Host Types on page 107.
5.
To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 46.
RS-232 Parameter Defaults
Table 19 lists defaults for RS-232 host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 19
RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Default
Page Number
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types
Standard
107
Baud Rate
9600
109
Parity
None
111
Stop Bits
1 Stop Bit
112
Data Bits
8-bit
112
Check Receive Errors
Enable
113
Hardware Handshaking
None
113
Software Handshaking
None
115
Host Serial Response Timeout
2 Seconds
117
RTS Line State
Low RTS
118
Beep on <BEL>
Disable
118
Intercharacter Delay
0 msec
119
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
Normal Operation
120
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Send Barcode With Unknown
Characters
120
103
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Host-Specific Parameter Settings
Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A or B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or Common Use Terminal Equipment (CUTE-LP/LG barcode readers)
sets the defaults listed in Table 20 and Table 21.
Table 20
RS-232 Host-Specific Settings
Parameter
ICL
Fujitsu
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS
Baud Rate
9600
9600
9600
9600
Parity
Even
None
Odd
Odd
Stop Bits
One
One
One
One
Data Bits
8-bit
8-bit
8-bit
8-bit
Hardware Handshaking
RTS/CTS Option
3
None
RTS/CTS Option
3
RTS/CTS Option
3
Software Handshaking
None
None
None
None
Serial Response Timeout
9.9 Seconds
2 Seconds
None
None
RTS Line State
High
Low
Low
Low = No data to
send
Beep On <BEL>
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Transmit Code ID
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data Transmission Format
Data/Suffix
Data/Suffix
Data/Suffix
Data/Suffix
Prefix
None
None
None
None
Suffix
CR (1013)
CR (1013)
CR (1013)
CR (1013)
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, when CTS is low, scanning is disabled and when CTS is high, scanning is
enabled.
If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear
unable to scan. In this case, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the
scanner.
Table 21
RS-232 Host-Specific Settings
Parameter
Olivetti
Omron
CUTE
Baud Rate
9600
9600
9600
Parity
Even
None
None
Stop Bits
One
One
One
Data Bits
7-bit
8-bit
8-bit
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan
*Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 143, and then change the host selection.
104
RS-232 Interface
Table 21
RS-232 Host-Specific Settings (Continued)
Parameter
Olivetti
Omron
CUTE
Hardware Handshaking
None
None
None
Software Handshaking
ACK/NAK
None
None
Serial Response Timeout
9.9 Seconds
9.9 Seconds
9.9 Seconds
RTS Line State
Low
High
High
Beep On <BEL>
Disable
Disable
Disable
Transmit Code ID
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data Transmission Format
Prefix/Data/
Suffix
Data/Suffix
Prefix/Data/
Suffix
Prefix
STX (1003)
None
STX (1002)
Suffix
ETX (1002)
CR (1013)
CR (1013) ETX
(1003)
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan
*Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 143, and then change the host selection.
RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters
Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A or B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or CUTE transmits the code ID
characters listed in Table 22 and Table 23. These characters are not programmable and are separate from the
Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID feature for these hosts.
Table 22
RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters
Code Type
ICL
Fujitsu
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS
UPC-A
A
A
A
A
UPC-E
E
E
C
C
EAN-8/JAN-8
FF
FF
B
B
EAN-13/JAN-13
F
F
A
A
Bookland EAN
F
F
A
A
Code 128
L <len>
None
K
K
GS1-128
L <len>
None
P
P
Code 39
C <len>
None
M
M
Code 39 Full ASCII
None
None
M
M
Trioptic
None
None
None
None
Code 32
None
None
None
None
Code 93
None
None
L
L
105
RS-232 Interface
Table 22
RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters (Continued)
Code Type
ICL
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A
Fujitsu
I 2 of 5
I <len>
None
I
I
D 2 of 5
H <len>
None
H
H
IATA
H<len>
None
H
H
Codabar
N <len>
None
N
N
MSI
None
None
O
O
GS1 DataBar Variants
None
None
E
E
PDF417
None
None
Q
Q
MicroPDF417
None
None
S
S
Data Matrix
None
None
R
R
GS1 Data Matrix
None
None
W
W
Maxicode
None
None
T
T
QR Code
None
None
U
U
GS1 QR
None
None
X
X
Aztec/Aztec Rune
None
None
V
V
Table 23
RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters
Code Type
Olivetti
Omron
CUTE
UPC-A
A
A
A
UPC-E
C
E
None
EAN-8/JAN-8
B
FF
None
EAN-13/JAN-13
A
F
A
Bookland EAN
A
F
None
Code 128
K <len>
L <len>
5
GS1-128
P <len>
L <len>
5
Code 39
M <len>
C <len>
3
Code 39 Full ASCII
None
None
3
Trioptic
None
None
None
Code 32
None
None
None
Code 93
L <len>
None
None
*This host does not support 2D barcodes.
106
RS-232 Interface
Table 23
RS-232 Host-Specific Code ID Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Olivetti
Omron
CUTE
I 2 of 5
I <len>
I <len>
1
D 2 of 5
H <len>
H <len>
2
IATA
H<len>
H<len>
2
Codabar
N <len>
N <len>
None
MSI
O <len>
None
None
GS1 DataBar Variants
None
None
None
PDF417
None
None
6
MicroPDF417
None
None
6
Data Matrix
None
None
4
QR Code
None
None
7
Aztec/Aztec Rune
None
None
8
*This host does not support 2D barcodes.
RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following barcodes.
NOTES 1 For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see
Communication Protocol Functionality.
2. Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g.,
parity, data bits, handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type barcode changes these settings.
3. The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select
CUTE, scan *Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 143, and then change the host
selection.
*Standard RS-232
ICL RS-232
107
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Host Types (continued)
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
Omron
OPOS/JPOS
Fujitsu RS-232
CUTE
108
RS-232 Interface
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the
scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host
device or may reach it in distorted form.
NOTE: The scanner does not support baud rates below 9600.
*Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 19,200
Baud Rate 38,400
Baud Rate 57,600
109
RS-232 Interface
Baud Rate (continued)
Baud Rate 115,200
Baud Rate 230,400
Baud Rate 460,800
Baud Rate 921,600
110
RS-232 Interface
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to
select the parity type according to host device requirements:
•
Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
odd number of 1 bits.
•
Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains
an even number of 1 bits.
•
None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
*None
111
RS-232 Interface
Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and
prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes
to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
*1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
Data Bits
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.
7-bit
*8-bit
112
RS-232 Interface
Check Receive Errors
Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters.
The parity value of received characters is verified against the value set for Parity on page 111.
*Check For Received Errors
Do Not Check For Received Errors
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking
lines Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS).
If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
NOTE: The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
Options:
•
None - This disables hardware handshaking and transmits scan data as it becomes available.
•
Standard RTS/CTS - This sets standard RTS/CTS hardware handshaking and transmits scanned data
according to the following sequence:
a.
The scanner reads the CTS line for activity:
•
If the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response
Timeout on page 117 for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits data when asserted. If, after the
timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
•
If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to de-assert
CTS. If after this timeout the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and
discards the scanned data.
b.
The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.
c.
The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.
During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a
transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
•
RTS/CTS Option 1 - The scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The
scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.
•
RTS/CTS Option 2 - RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner
waits for the host to assert CTS before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within the Host Serial
113
RS-232 Interface
Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. During data transmission,
if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and
discards the data.
•
RTS/CTS Option 3 - This transmits scanned data according to the following sequence:
d.
The scanner asserts RTS before data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS.
e.
The scanner waits up to the Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits
data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error
and discards the data.
f.
The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.
g.
The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.
During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a
transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
*None
Standard RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS Option 1
RTS/CTS Option 2
RTS/CTS Option 3
114
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware
handshaking. If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes
precedence.
Options:
•
None - This transmits data immediately. The scanner expects no response from the host.
•
ACK/NAK - After transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK response from the host. If it
receives a NAK, the scanner transmits the data again and waits for an ACK or NAK. After three
unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the scanner sounds a transmit error and
discards the data.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If
the scanner does not get a response in this time, it sounds a transmit error and discards the data. There
are no reattempts.
•
ENQ - The scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If it does not receive
an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the
data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Timeout to prevent
transmission errors.
•
ACK/NAK with ENQ - This combines the two previous options. An additional ENQ is not required to
re-transmit data due to a NAK from the host.
•
XON/XOFF - An XOFF character stops data transmission until the scanner receives an XON character.
There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
•
The scanner receives an XOFF before it has data to send. When the scanner has data, it waits up to
the Host Serial Response Timeout for an XON character before transmitting. If it does not receive the
XON within this time, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
•
The scanner receives an XOFF during data transmission and stops transmission after sending the
current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data. The scanner
waits indefinitely for the XON.
115
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking (continued)
*None
ACK/NAK
ENQ
ACK/NAK with ENQ
XON/XOFF
116
RS-232 Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before
determining that a transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software
handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode,
*Minimum: 2 Seconds
Low: 2.5 Seconds
Medium: 5 Seconds
High: 7.5 Seconds
Maximum: 9.9 Seconds
117
RS-232 Interface
RTS Line State
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the idle state of the serial host RTS line to Low RTS or High RTS.
*Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
Beep on <BEL>
Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character
on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
Beep On <BEL> Character
(Enable)
*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable)
118
RS-232 Interface
Intercharacter Delay
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
*Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec
Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec
Maximum: 99 msec
119
RS-232 Interface
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, scan one of the following barcodes to indicate when the scanner beeps and turns
on its LED after a decode.
*Normal Operation
(Beep/LED Immediately After Decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown
Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character.
The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
120
RS-232 Interface
ASCII Character Sets
See ASCII Character Set on page 471 for prefix/suffix values.
121
IBM 468X / 469X Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 24 on page 124 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select the Port 9B address, scan
the Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) barcode under Port Address on page 125. The scanner issues a
fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
122
IBM 468X / 469X Interface
Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Figure 15
IBM Connection
Interface cable
Host port
connector
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated
in Figure 15, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1.
Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 28.
2.
Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9).
3.
The scanner automatically detects the host interface type, but there is no default setting. Scan the appropriate
barcode from Port Address on page 125 to select the port address.
4.
To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
NOTE: The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system typically controls other scanner
parameters.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 46.
123
IBM 468X / 469X Interface
IBM Parameter Defaults
Table 24 lists defaults for IBM host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 24
IBM 468X/469X Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Default
Page Number
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
None
125
Convert Unknown to Code 39
Disable
126
RS-485 Beep Directive
Ignore
126
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive
Ignore
127
IBM-485 Specification Version
Original Specification
127
124
IBM 468X / 469X Interface
IBM Host Parameters
Port Address
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the IBM 468X/469X port.
NOTES 4 Scanning a Port Address barcode enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner.
5. For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see
Communication Protocol Functionality.
*None
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
125
IBM 468X / 469X Interface
Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
RS-485 Beep Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can send a beeper configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to
prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the host as if they
were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
*Ignore Beep Directive
126
IBM 468X / 469X Interface
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to
prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS-485 host
as if they were processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
*Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version
Parameter # 1729
SSI # F8h 06h C1h
Select IBM-485 Original Specification to report only symbologies historically supported on each port as known.
Select IBM-485 Version 2.2 to report all symbologies supported in the new IBM specification as known with the
respective code types.
*IBM-485 Original Specification
(0)
IBM-485 (Version 2.2)
(1)
127
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the scanner. The scanner connects between
the keyboard and host computer and translates barcode data into keystrokes, which the host accepts as if they
originated from the keyboard. This mode adds barcode reading functionality to a system designed for manual
keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 25 on page 130 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan a barcode in Default Parameters on page 142. Throughout the
programming barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select a medium keystroke delay,
scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under Keystroke Delay on page 132. The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
128
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface
Figure 16
Keyboard Wedge Connection
Power supply
(if required)
Male DIN
connector
Keyboard
connector
Female DIN
connector
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated
in Figure 16, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1.
Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.
2.
Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See Inserting the
Interface Cable on page 28.
3.
Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.
4.
Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.
5.
If required, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.
6.
Ensure that all connections are secure.
7.
Turn on the host system.
8.
The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does
not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on page 131.
9.
To modify other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this guide.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 46.
129
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
Table 25 lists defaults for keyboard wedge host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 25
Keyboard Wedge Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Default
Page Number
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type
IBM AT Notebook
131
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Send Barcodes with Unknown
Characters
131
Keystroke Delay
No Delay
132
Intra-keystroke Delay
Disable
132
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
Enable
133
Quick Keypad Emulation
Enable
133
Simulated Caps Lock
Disable
134
Caps Lock Override
Disable
134
Convert Case
Do Not Convert
135
Function Key Mapping
Disable
136
FN1 Substitution
Disable
136
Send Make and Break
Send
137
130
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the keyboard wedge host.
NOTE: For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see
Communication Protocol Functionality.
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
*IBM AT Notebook
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown
Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character.
The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
131
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan one of the following barcodes to increase the
delay when hosts require a slower data transmission.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Intra-keystroke Delay
Scan Enable Intra-keystroke Delay to insert an additional delay between each emulated key press and release.
This also sets Keystroke Delay to a minimum of 5 msec.
Enable Intra-keystroke Delay
*Disable Intra-keystroke Delay
132
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Country Codes in a Microsoft® operating
system environment.
NOTE: If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes on page 491), disable
Quick Keypad Emulation on page 133 and ensure Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 133 is
enabled.
*Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Quick Keypad Emulation
This enables faster keypad emulation where character value sequences are only sent for characters not found on
the keyboard.
NOTE: This option applies only when Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation is enabled.
*Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
133
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock state is
enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state. Note that this only
applies to alpha characters.
Enable Caps Lock
*Disable Caps Lock
Caps Lock Override
Scan Enable Caps Lock Override for AT or AT Notebook hosts to preserve the case of the data regardless of the
state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’ in the barcode transmits as an ‘A’ regardless of the setting of the
keyboard’s Caps Lock key.
Enable Caps Lock Override
*Disable Caps Lock Override
NOTE: If both Simulated Caps Lock and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes
precedence.
134
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE: Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
Convert to Upper Case
Convert to Lower Case
*Do Not Convert
135
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 38 on page 471). Scan Enable
Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not
have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
*Disable Function Key Mapping
FN1 Substitution
Scan Enable FN1 Substitution to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 barcode with a user-selected keystroke
(see FN1 Substitution Values on page 183).
Enable FN1 Substitution
*Disable FN1 Substitution
136
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Send Make and Break
Scan Send Make and Break Scan Codes to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.
*Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only
NOTE: Windows-based systems must use Send Make and Break Scan Codes.
Keyboard Map
The following keyboard map is a reference for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix
values, see the barcodes on page 180.
7014
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5012
5011
7008
7009
7010
7007
7006
7001
7011
7012
7003
7002
7004
7005
7013
7015
7017
Figure 17
IBM PS2 Type Keyboard
ASCII Character Sets
See ASCII Character Sets for the following information:
•
ASCII Character Set on page 471
•
ALT Key Character Set on page 476
•
GUI Key Character Set on page 477
•
PF Key Character Set on page 478
•
F Key Character Set on page 479
•
Numeric Key Character Set on page 480
•
Extended Key Character Set on page 480
137
7016
7018
User Preferences &
Miscellaneous Options
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes
user preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 26 on page 139 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the
power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks indicate (*) default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan
the High Frequency (beeper tone) barcode listed under Beeper Tone on page 146. The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
138
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults
Table 26 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 26
User Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page
Number
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
142
Parameter Barcode Scanning
236
ECh
Enable
143
Beep After Good Decode
56
38h
Enable
144
Beeper Volume
140
8Ch
High
145
Beeper Tone
145
91h
Medium
146
Beeper Duration
628
F1h 74h
Medium
147
Suppress Power Up Beeps
721
F1h D1h
Do Not Suppress
148
LED on Good Decode
744
F1h E8h
Enable
149
Direct Decode Indicator
859
F2h 5Bh
Disable
149
Decode Pager Motor (DS4608-HC and
DS4608-DPE Only)
613
F1h 65h
Enable
150
Decode Pager Motor Duration
(DS4608-HC Only)
626
F1h 72h
150 msec
151
Night Mode Trigger (DS4608-HC and
DS4608-DPE Only)
1215
F8h 04h BFh
DS4608-HC: Enable
154
Night Mode Toggle (DS4608-HC Only
DS4608-DPE)
N/A
N/A
N/A
154
Low Power Mode
128
80h
Disable
155
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
146
92h
1 Hour
156
Trigger Mode (or Hand-held Trigger Mode)
138
8Ah
Auto Aim
158
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
306
F0h 32h
Enable
159
DS4608-DPE: Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
139
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Table 26
User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page
Number
Hands-free (Presentation) Decode Aiming
Pattern
590
F1h 4Eh
Disable Hands-free
(Presentation) Decode
Aiming Pattern
160
Hands-free Mode
630
F1h 76h
Enable
161
Picklist Mode
402
F0h 92h
Disable Picklist Mode
Always
162
Continuous Barcode Read
649
F1h 89h
Disable
163
Unique Barcode Reporting
723
F1h D3h
Enable
164
Decode Session Timeout
136
88h
9.9 Seconds
164
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
137
89h
0.5 Seconds
165
Timeout Between Decodes, Different
Symbols
144
90h
0.1 Seconds
165
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
724
F1h D4h
Disable
166
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
716
F1h CCh
Normal
167
PDF Prioritization
719
F4h F1h CFh
Disable
168
PDF Prioritization Timeout
720
F1h D0h
200 ms
168
Presentation Mode Field of View
609
F1h 61h
Full
170
Decoding Illumination
298
F0h 2Ah
Enable
171
Illumination Brightness
669
F1h 9Dh
High
172
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Mode
Only)
858
F2h 5Ah
Less
173
Product ID (PID) Type
1281
F8h 05h 01h
Host Type Unique
174
Product ID (PID) Value
1725
F8h 06h BDh
0
174
ECLevel
1710
F8h 06h AEh
0
175
429
F0h ADh
Cycle Illumination
176
DPM Parameters (DS4608-DPE Only)
DPM Illumination
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
140
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Table 26
User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
DPM Mode
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page
Number
1438
F8h 05h 9Eh
Enable
177
Enter Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
178
Tab Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
178
Transmit Code ID Character
45
2Dh
None
179
Prefix Value
99, 105
63h, 69h
7013 <CR><LF>
180
Suffix 1 Value
98, 104
62h, 68h
7013 <CR><LF>
180
Suffix 2 Value
100, 106
64h, 6Ah
Scan Data Transmission Format
235
EBh
Data As Is
181
FN1 Substitution Values
103, 109
67h, 6Dh
7013 <CR><LF>
183
Transmit “No Read” Message
94
5E
Disable
184
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
1118
F8h 04h 5Eh
Disable
185
securPharm Decoding
1752
F8h 06h D8h
Disable
186
securPharm Output Formatting
1753
F8h 06h D9h
No Formatting
187
Miscellaneous Options
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
141
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
User Preferences
Default Parameters
Scan one of the following barcodes to reset the scanner to its default settings as follows:
•
•
Restore Defaults resets all default parameters as follows:
•
If you configured custom default parameter values via the Write to Custom Defaults barcode,
scanning the Restore Defaults barcode restores these custom values.
•
If you did not configure custom default parameter values, scanning the Restore Defaults barcode
restores the factory default values. See Standard Parameter Defaults for these values.
Set Factory Defaults clears all custom default values and sets the factory default values. See Standard
Parameter Defaults for these values.
Write to Custom Defaults
To create a set of custom defaults, select the desired parameter values in this guide, and then scan Write to
Custom Defaults.
Restore Defaults
Set Factory Defaults
Write to Custom Defaults
142
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Parameter Barcode Scanning
Parameter # 236
SSI # ECh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to enable or disable the decoding of parameter barcodes,
including the Set Defaults barcodes.
*Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning
(1)
Disable Parameter Barcode Scanning
(0)
143
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beep After Good Decode
Parameter # 56
SSI # 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode.
If you select Disable Beep After Good Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to
indicate error conditions.
*Enable Beep After Good Decode
(1)
Disable Beep After Good Decode
(0)
144
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beeper Volume
Parameter # 140
SSI # 8Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beeper volume.
Low Volume
(2)
Medium Volume
(1)
*High Volume
(0)
145
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beeper Tone
Parameter # 145
SSI # 91h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beeper tone for the good decode beep.
Disable Tone
(3)
Low Tone
(2)
*Medium Tone
(1)
High Tone
(0)
Medium to High Tone (2-tone)
(4)
146
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beeper Duration
Parameter # 628
SSI # F1h 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the duration for the good decode beep.
Short Duration
(0)
*Medium Duration
(1)
Long Duration
(2)
147
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Suppress Power Up Beeps
Parameter # 721
SSI # F1h D1h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to suppress the scanner’s power-up beeps.
*Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps
(0)
Suppress Power Up Beeps
(1)
148
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
LED on Good Decode
Parameter # 744
SSI # F1h E8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the LED blinks on a good decode.
*Enable LED on Good Decode
(2)
Disable LED on Good Decode
(0)
Direct Decode Indicator
Parameter # 859
SSI # F2h 5Bh
This parameter is only supported in Auto Aim and Standard (Level) Hand-held Trigger Mode. Scan one of the
following barcodes to select optional blinking of the illumination on a successful decode if you continue to hold the
trigger. If you release the trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur. This allows you to choose additional
feedback for a successful decode by holding the trigger, or to continue to scan as normal.
•
*Disable Direct Decode Indicator - Illumination does not blink on a successful decode.
•
1 Blink - Illumination blinks once upon a successful decode.
•
2 Blinks - Illumination blinks twice upon a successful decode.
*Disable Direct Decode Indicator
(0)
1 Blink
(1)
2 Blinks
(2)
149
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decode Pager Motor (DS4608-HC Only and DS4608-DPE)
Parameter # 613
SSI # F1h 65h
The scanner includes a pager motor which, when enabled, vibrates the scanner for a period of time when a
successful decode occurs.
NOTE: While the scanner is in the Intellistand, the pager motor is disabled.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable the pager motor. If enabled, scan a Decode Pager Motor
Duration (DS4608-HC Only) barcode to set the duration of the pager motor vibration.
*Enable Pager Motor
(1)
Disable Pager Motor
(0)
150
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decode Pager Motor Duration (DS4608-HC Only)
Parameter # 626
SSI # F1h 72h
If you enabled Decode Pager Motor (DS4608-HC Only and DS4608-DPE), scan one of the following barcodes to
set the duration of the pager motor vibration.
*150 msec
(15)
200 msec
(20)
250 msec
(25)
300 msec
(30)
151
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decode Pager Motor Duration (continued)
400 msec
(40)
500 msec
(50)
600 msec
(60)
750 msec
(75)
152
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Night Mode (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only)
The Night Mode feature allows you to easily switch to a “quiet mode” in order to use the pager motor with the
beeper off. Enter and exit Night Mode in one of two ways:
•
If Night Mode Trigger (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only) is enabled, you can use the trigger to toggle
between entering and exiting Night Mode. To do this, point the scanner away from a barcode and press the
trigger until the beam goes off. Hold the trigger for an additional 5 seconds.
NOTE: After decoding a barcode, holding the trigger an additional 5 seconds has no affect.
•
Scan the Night Mode Toggle (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only) barcode to enter or exit Night Mode,
regardless of the state of the Night Mode Trigger (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only) parameter.
Entering Night Mode enables Decode Pager Motor (DS4608-HC Only and DS4608-DPE), and disables Beep After
Good Decode.
Also note the following scanner behavior regarding Night Mode:
•
Exiting Night Mode returns the scanner to the previously programmed states for the three parameters
changed. For example, if Beep After Good Decode was enabled before entering Night Mode, it returns to
enabled upon exiting Night Mode.
•
When entering Night Mode, the pager motor vibrates. When exiting Night Mode, the scanner emits two
short beeps.
•
Scanning a Default Parameters barcode causes the scanner to exit Night Mode.
•
For scanners that do not use a pager motor, scanning any of the Night Mode parameters or the pager
motor parameters results in an error beep.
•
If the scanner loses power while in Night Mode because a cable is disconnected, on the next power up the
scanner exits Night Mode and resumes normal operation.
153
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Night Mode Trigger (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only)
Parameter # 1215
SSI # F8h 04h BFh
Scan Enable Night Mode Trigger to use the trigger to toggle between entering and exiting Night Mode. To toggle,
point the scanner away from a barcode, press the trigger until the beam goes off, and then hold the trigger for an
additional 5 seconds. Note that pressing the trigger an additional 5 seconds after decoding a barcode has no
affect.
When entering Night Mode, the pager motor vibrates. When exiting Night Mode, the scanner emits two short
beeps.
*Enable Night Mode Trigger DS4608-HC
(1)
*Disable Night Mode Trigger DS4608-DPE
(0)
Night Mode Toggle (DS4608-HC and DS4608-DPE Only)
Scan this barcode to toggle between entering and exiting Night Mode without using the trigger. This functions
regardless of the state of the Night Mode Trigger parameter.
When entering Night Mode, the pager motor vibrates. When exiting Night Mode, the scanner emits two short
beeps.
Toggle Night Mode
154
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Low Power Mode
Parameter # 128
SSI # 80h
NOTE: The Low Power Mode parameter only applies for non-USB and non-RS485 host interfaces, and when
Hand-held Trigger Mode on page 158 is set to Level (Standard).
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner enters low power mode after a decode
attempt or host communication. This applies to serial and keyboard wedge connections, If disabled, power
remains on after each decode attempt.
If you enable this, see Time Delay to Low Power Mode to set the inactivity time period.
Enable Low Power Mode
(1)
*Disable Low Power Mode
(0)
155
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
Parameter # 146
SSI # 92h
NOTE: This parameter only applies when Low Power Mode is enabled.
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the time the scanner remains active before entering low power mode.
The scanner wakes upon trigger press or when the host attempts to communicate with the scanner.
1 Second
(17)
10 Seconds
(26)
1 Minute
(33)
5 Minutes
(37)
15 Minutes
(43)
156
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)
30 Minutes
(45)
45 Minutes
(46)
*1 Hour
(49)
3 Hours
(51)
6 Hours
(54)
9 Hours
(57)
157
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hand-held Trigger Mode
Parameter # 138
SSI # 8Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a trigger mode for the scanner:
•
Standard (Level) - A trigger press activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the
barcode decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout on page 164 occurs.
•
Presentation (Blink) - The scanner activates decode processing when it detects a barcode in its field of
view. After a period of non-use, the LEDs turn off until the scanner senses motion.
•
*Auto Aim - The scanner projects the aiming pattern when lifted. A trigger press activates decode
processing. After a period of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off.
Standard (Level)
(0)
Presentation (Blink)
(7)
*Auto Aim
(9)
158
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 306
SSI # F0h 32h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hand-held mode:
•
Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during barcode capture.
•
Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.
•
Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner
detects a PDF barcode.
NOTE: With Picklist Mode on page 162 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even if you disable the
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern.
*Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
(2)
Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
(0)
Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF
(3)
159
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hands-free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 590
SSI # F1h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hands-free mode:
•
Enable Hands-free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during
barcode capture.
•
Disable Hands-free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.
•
Enable Hands-free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern
when the scanner detects a PDF barcode.
NOTE: With Picklist Mode on page 162 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when you disable the
Hands-free Decode Aiming Pattern.
Enable Hands-free (Presentation)
Decode Aiming Pattern
(1)
*Disable Hands-free (Presentation)
Decode Aiming Pattern
(0)
Enable Hands-free (Presentation)
Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF
(2)
160
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hands-free Mode
Parameter # 630
SSI # F1h 76h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable hands-free mode:
•
Enable Hands-free Mode - When you place the scanner in a hands-free stand, it automatically triggers
when presented with a barcode. Removing the scanner from the stand or pulling the trigger causes it to
behave according to the setting of the Hand-held Trigger Mode on page 158.
•
Disable Hands-free Mode - The scanner behaves according to the setting of the Hand-held Trigger Mode
on page 158 regardless of whether it is hand-held or in a stand.
*Enable Hands-free Mode
(1)
Disable Hands-free Mode
(0)
161
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Picklist Mode
Parameter # 402
SSI # F0h 92h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Picklist Mode. In this mode, you can pick out and decode a barcode
from a group of barcodes that are printed close together by placing the aiming pattern on the barcode you want to
decode.
NOTE: Enabling Picklist Mode overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern options. You can not disable the
decode aiming pattern when Picklist Mode is enabled.
Enabling Picklist Mode can slow decode speed and hinder the ability to decode longer barcodes.
•
Enable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always enabled.
•
Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is out of
hands-free mode and disabled when the scanner is in presentation mode.
•
Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is in hands-free
mode only.
•
Disable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always disabled.
Enable Picklist Mode Always
(2)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode
(1)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode
(3)
*Disable Picklist Mode Always
(0)
162
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Continuous Barcode Read
Parameter # 649
SSI # F1h 89h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read to report every barcode while the trigger is pressed.
NOTE: We strongly recommend enabling Picklist Mode on page 162 with this parameter. Disabling Picklist
Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one barcode is in the scanner's field of view.
Enable Continuous Barcode Read
(1)
*Disable Continuous Barcode Read
(0)
163
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Unique Barcode Reporting
Parameter # 723
SSI # F1h D3h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read Uniqueness to report only unique barcodes while the trigger is
pressed. This option only applies when Continuous Barcode Read is enabled.
*Enable Unique Barcode Reporting
(1)
Disable Unique Barcode Reporting
(0)
Decode Session Timeout
Parameter # 136
SSI # 88h
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in
0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.
To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric
Barcodes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For example, to set
a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan this barcode, and then scan the 0 and 5 barcodes. To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
Decode Session Timeout
164
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Parameter # 137
SSI # 89h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Barcode Read mode to prevent the scanner from continuously
decoding the same barcode when it is left in the scanner’s field of view. The barcode must be out of the field of
view for the timeout period before the scanner reads the same consecutive symbol. It is programmable in 0.1
second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the following barcode, and then scan two
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
Parameter # 144
SSI # 90h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Barcode Read to control the time the scanner waits before
decoding a different symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is
0.1 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the following barcode, and then scan two
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
NOTE: Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols cannot be greater than or equal to the Decode Session
Timeout.
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
165
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
Parameter # 724
SSI # F1h D4h
NOTE: This feature does not apply to Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols.
NOTE: Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol cannot be greater than or equal to the Time Delay to Low
Power Mode (parameter #146 on page 156).
Scan Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol below to apply Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
(parameter #137 on page 165) in hand-held trigger mode. Subsequent scans of Enable Triggered Timeout,
Same Symbol are ignored until Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol expires.
Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
(1)
* Disable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
(0)
166
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
Parameter # 716
SSI # F1h CCh
This mode improves barcode reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays. Scan one of the
following barcodes to select the desired mode.
*Normal Mobile Phone/Display Mode
(0)
Enhanced in Hand-held Mode
(1)
Enhanced in Hands-free Mode
(2)
Enhanced in Both Modes
(3)
167
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
PDF Prioritization
Parameter # 719
SSI # F4h F1h CFh
Scan Enable PDF Prioritization to delay decoding certain 1D barcodes (see Note below) by the value specified in
PDF Prioritization Timeout. During that time the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol (e.g., on a US
driver's license), and if successful, reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417 symbol, it reports
the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device’s field of view for the scanner to report it.
This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.
NOTE: The 1D Code 128 barcode lengths include the following:
•
7 to 10 characters
•
14 to 22 characters
•
27 to 28 characters
In addition, a Code 39 barcode with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US
driver’s license:
•
8 characters
•
12 characters
Enable PDF Prioritization
(1)
*Disable PDF Prioritization
(0)
168
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
PDF Prioritization Timeout
Parameter # 720
SSI # F1h D0h
If you enabled PDF Prioritization, set this timeout to indicate how long the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417
symbol before reporting the 1D barcode in the field of view.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that specify the timeout in
milliseconds. For example, to enter 400 ms, scan the following barcode, and then scan 0400. The range is 0 to
5000 ms, and the default is 200 ms.
PDF Prioritization Timeout
169
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Presentation Mode Field of View
Parameter # 609
SSI # F1h 61h
In presentation mode, by default the scanner searches the larger area of the aiming pattern (Full Field of View).
Select Small Field of View or Medium Field of View to search for a barcode in a smaller region around the
aiming pattern’s center in order to speed search time.
Small Field of View
(0)
Medium Field of View
(1)
*Full Field of View
(2)
170
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decoding Illumination
Parameter # 298
SSI # F0h 2Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to determine whether the scanner turns on illumination to aid decoding.
Enabling illumination usually results in superior images and better decode performance. The effectiveness of the
illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
*Enable Decoding Illumination
(1)
Disable Decoding Illumination
(0)
171
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Illumination Brightness
Parameter # 669
SSI # F1h 9Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the illumination brightness used during an active decode session. This
only applies in hand-held mode (not in presentation mode).
NOTE: Selecting a lower brightness level can affect decode performance.
Low Illumination Brightness
(0)
Medium Illumination Brightness
(3)
*High Illumination Brightness
(10)
172
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Modes Only)
Parameter # 858
SSI # F2h 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a motion tolerance option:
•
Less Motion Tolerance - This provides optimal decoding performance on 1D barcodes.
•
More Motion Tolerance - This increases motion tolerance and speeds decoding when scanning a series
of 1D barcodes in rapid progression.
*Less Motion Tolerance
(0)
More Motion Tolerance
(1)
173
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Product ID (PID) Type
Parameter # 1281
SSI # F8h 05h 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to define the PID value reported in USB enumeration.
*Host Type Unique
(0)
Product Unique
(1)
IBM Unique
(2)
Product ID (PID) Value
Parameter # 1725
SSI # F8h 06h BDh
To set a Product ID value, scan Set PID Value, and then scan four numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes that
correspond to the value. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page 452. The range is (0,1600-1649).
NOTE: This parameter applies to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global Commerce
Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface.
Set PID Value
174
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
ECLevel
Parameter # 1710
SSI # F8h 06h AEh
To set an ECLevel value, scan Set ECLevel, and then scan five numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes that
correspond to the desired level. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a
selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
NOTE: This parameter applies to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global Commerce
Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface. It allows defining an
ECLevel value to manage and control Flash Update operations on the 4690 operating system.
Contact the Zebra Customer Support Center online at: www.zebra.com/support for more information.
Set ECLevel
175
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
DPM Parameters (DS4608-DPE Only)
DPM Illumination Control
Parameter # 429
SSI # F0h ADh
This parameter controls the Illumination for DPM barcode reading.
•
Direct Illumination - scanner uses only the direct illumination.
•
Indirect Illumination - scanner uses only the Diffused illumination.
•
Cycle Illumination - scanner cycles alternately between direct and indirect illumination. The scanner starts
with the illumination used during the last successful decode.
Direct Illumination
(0)
Indirect Illumination
(1)
* Cycle Illumination
(3)
176
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
DPM Mode
Parameter # 1438
SSI # F8h 05h 9Eh
Unlike barcodes typically printed on labels, a direct part mark (DPM) is a symbol that is marked, using methods
such as laser etching and dot peening, directly on an item surface for permanent identification. A DPM reader can
scan these types of symbols. Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DPM mode:
•
Disable DPM Mode - No special processing occurs.
.
NOTE: If you enable a DPM Mode, disable Picklist Mode on page 162 when scanning a DPM barcode. Picklist
performance is not guaranteed for DPM barcodes.
If you enable a DPM Mode, the decoder behaves as if the Data Matrix Inverse Autodetect setting is
selected. If you disable DPM, the previous (user-selected) Data Matrix Inverse setting remains in
effect. See Data Matrix Inverse on page 306.
Disable DPM Mode
(0)
*Enable DPM Mode
(1)
177
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters
Enter Key
Scan the following barcode to add an Enter key (carriage return/line feed) after scanned data.
To program other prefixes and/or suffixes, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 180.
Add Enter Key (Carriage Return/Line Feed)
Tab Key
Scan the following barcode to add a Tab key after scanned data.
Tab Key
178
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Transmit Code ID Character
Parameter # 45
SSI # 2Dh
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned barcode. This is useful when decoding more than one
code type. In addition to any single character prefix selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix
and the decoded symbol.
Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID characters,
see Symbol Code Identifiers on page 482 and AIM Code Identifiers on page 484.
NOTE: If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit “No Read”
Message on page 184, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
Symbol Code ID Character
(2)
AIM Code ID Character
(1)
*None
(0)
179
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Prefix/Suffix Values
Key Category Parameter # P = 99, S1 = 98, S2 = 100
SSI # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h
Decimal Value Parameter # P = 105, S1 = 104, S2 = 106
SSI # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah
You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix
or suffix, scan one of the following barcodes, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond
to that value. See ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes.
When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit
decimal value. See ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes.
The default prefix and suffix value is 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). To correct an error or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page 452.
NOTE: To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 181.
Scan Prefix
(7)
Scan Suffix 1
(6)
Scan Suffix 2
(8)
Data Format Cancel
180
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Scan Data Transmission Format
Parameter # 235
SSI # EBh
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following barcodes corresponding to the desired format.
NOTE: If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.
To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 180.
*Data As Is
(0)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(1)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(2)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(3)
181
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA >
(4)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(5)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(6)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(7)
182
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
FN1 Substitution Values
Key Category Parameter # 103
Key Category SSI # 67h
Decimal Value Parameter # 109
Decimal Value SSI # 6Dh
Keyboard wedge and USB HID keyboard hosts support a FN1 substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any
FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 barcode with a value. This value defaults to 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key).
When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set
the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value.
To select a FN1 substitution value via barcode menus:
1.
Scan the following barcode.
Set FN1 Substitution Value
2.
Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host
interface, and enter the 4-digit ASCII value by scanning four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel.
To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution barcode on page 183.
183
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Transmit “No Read” Message
Parameter # 94
SSI # 5Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set an option for transmitting the No Read (NR) characters:
NOTES 1 If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID
Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 179, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39
to the NR message.
2. This does not apply in presentation mode.
•
Enable No Read - This transmits the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before
trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 164.
•
Disable No Read - This sends nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode.
Enable No Read
(1)
*Disable No Read
(0)
184
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
Parameter # 1118
SSI # F8h 04h 5Eh
The scanner can send unsolicited heartbeat messages to assist in diagnostics. To enable this parameter and set
the desired unsolicited heartbeat interval, scan one of the following time interval barcodes, or scan Set Another
Interval followed by four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired number of seconds. The
range is 0 - 9999.
Scan Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval to turn off the feature.
The heartbeat event is sent as decode data (with no decode beep) in the form of:
MOTEVTHB:nnn
where nnn is a three-digit sequence number starting at 001 and wrapping after 100.
10 Seconds
(10)
1 Minute
(60)
Set Another Interval
*Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
(0)
185
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
securPharm Decoding
Parameter # 1752
SSI # F8h 06h D8h
securPharm implements the IFA and GS1 Coding System for the European pharmaceutical industry. securPharm
code is used to prevent pharmaceutical counterfeiting.
When this feature is enabled, if a GS1 symbol is decoded and includes any aspects of the Application Identifier
associated with the securPharm GS1 specifications, the entire GS1 symbol is processed as a securPharm symbol.
For this reason, it is expected that under certain circumstances, a GS1 barcodes that is a securPharm symbol may
not be processed properly; if the GS1 symbol is not created as per the specification. The output cannot be
guaranteed as valid.
Although the GS1-128 type and the GS1 DataBar family are not specifically indicated in the IFA specification, they
are supported.
The securPharm output is in XML format and can include the product number, serial number, lot number,
expiration and Date of Manufacturing. The XML tags can be arranged in any order. Tags that are not in the
barcode are omitted. For example:
<content dfi=”value_dfi”>
<Daten_1>value_Daten_1</Daten_1>
<Daten_2>value_Daten_2</Daten_2>
<Daten_n>value_Daten_n</Daten_n>
</content>
Where:
value_dfi = IFA or GS1
Daten_1 to Daten_n is the production number, serial number, etc.
Scan a barcode below to enable or disable the ability to process pharmaceutical type barcodes.
*Disable securPharm Decoding
(0)
Enable securPharm Decoding
(1)
186
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
securPharm Output Formatting
Parameter # 1753
SSI # F8h 06h D9h
NOTE: securPharm output formatting is effective only when securPharm Decoding on page 186 is enabled.
securPharm Output Formatting parameter options represent bit positions. Therefore, any combination of
formatting can be used.
When you scan a securPharm Output Formatting barcode, the securPharm output is formatted in a number of
ways.
Sample GS1 Format
Product Number: GTIN Data Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: GS1
<content dfi="GS1">
Data Carrier
FNC104150123456782
> Scanned Barcode >
101A234B5FNC1
1717231
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<exp>151231</exp>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled
The output has no format:
0104150123456782101A234B517151231211234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0)
The output is a single line of characters:
<content
dfi="GS1"><gtin>04150123456782</gtin><lot>1A234B5</lot><exp>151231</exp><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1)
The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body:
<content
dfi="GS1">[tab]<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>[tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot>[tab]<exp>151231</exp>[tab]<sn>12345
67890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="GS1">
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<exp>151231</exp>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
187
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="GS1">
[tab]
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
[tab]
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
[tab]
<exp>151231</exp>
[tab]
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
Sample IFA Format
Product Number: PPNData Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: IFA
<content dfi="IFA">
Data Carrier
Mac069N11123456782Gs
<ppn>111234567842</ppn>
> Scanned Barcode >
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
1T1A234B5Gs
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
D151231Gs
</content>
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled
The output has no format:
[)>069N1112345678421T1A234B5S1234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0)
The output is a single line of characters:
<content
dfi="IFA"><ppn>111234567842</ppn><lot>1A234B5</lot><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1)
The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body:
<content
dfi="IFA">[tab]<ppn>111234567842</ppn>[tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot>[tab]<sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="IFA">
<ppn>111234567842</ppn>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
188
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="IFA">
[tab]
<ppn>111234567842</ppn>
[tab]
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
[tab]
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
securPharm Output Formatting Barcodes
Scan a barcode below to format the securPharm output.
*No Formatting
(0)
Insert Tab
(1)
Insert New Line
(2)
Insert Tab and New Line
(3)
189
Image Capture Preferences
Introduction
You can program the imager to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes
image capture preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
NOTE: Only the Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging interface supports image capture. See USB Device
Type on page 62 to enable this host.
The imager ships with the settings shown in Table 27 on page 191 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option
Option value
190
Image Capture Preferences
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to disable image capture illumination,
scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination barcode under Image Capture Illumination on page 194. The
imager issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
Table 27 lists defaults for image capture preference parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 27
Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page
Number
Image Capture Preferences
Operational Modes
N/A
N/A
N/A
193
Image Capture Illumination
361
F0h 69h
Enable
194
Image Capture Autoexposure
360
F0h 68h
Enable
194
Fixed Exposure
567
F4h F1h 37h
100
195
Analog Gain
1232
F4h D0h
Analog Gain x 2
196
Digital Gain
1233
F4h D1h
32
196
Snapshot Mode Timeout
323
F0h 43h
0 (30 seconds)
197
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
300
F0h 2Ch
Enable
198
Silence Operational Mode Changes
1293
F8h 05h 0Dh
Disable (do not silence)
198
Image Cropping
301
F0h 2Dh
Disable
199
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
191
Image Capture Preferences
Table 27
Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page
Number
Crop to Pixel Addresses
315
316
317
318
F4h F0h 3Bh
F4h F0h 3Ch
F4h F0h 3Dh
F4h F0h 3Eh
0 top
0 left
799 bottom
1279 right
199
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
302
F0h 2Eh
Full
201
Image Brightness (Target White)
390
F0h 86h
180
202
JPEG Image Options
299
F0h 2Bh
Quality
202
JPEG Quality Value
305
F0h 31h
65
203
JPEG Size Value
561
F1h 31h
160 kB
203
Image Enhancement
564
F1h 34h
Low (1)
204
Image File Format Selection
304
F0h 30h
JPEG
205
Image Rotation
665
F1h 99h
0
206
Bits per Pixel (BPP)
303
F0h 2Fh
8 BPP
207
Signature Capture
93
5Dh
Disable
208
Signature Capture Image File Format
Selection
313
F0h 39h
JPEG
209
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP)
314
F0h 3Ah
8 BPP
210
Signature Capture Width
366
F4h F0h 6Eh
400
211
Signature Capture Height
367
F4h F0h 6Fh
100
211
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
421
F0h A5h
65
212
Video Mode Format Selector
916
F2h 94h
JPEG
212
Video View Finder
324
F0h 44h
Disable
213
Target Video Frame Size
328
F0h 48h
2200 bytes
213
Video View Finder Image Size
329
F0h 49h
1700 bytes
214
Video Resolution
667
F1h 9Bh
1/4 resolution
214
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
192
Image Capture Preferences
Image Capture Preferences
The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics.
Operational Modes
The imager has three modes of operation:
•
Decode Mode
•
Snapshot Mode
•
Video Mode.
Decode Mode
By default, when you press the trigger the imager attempts to locate and decode enabled barcodes within its field
of view. The imager remains in this mode until it decodes a barcode or you release the trigger.
Snapshot Mode
Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high-quality image and transmit it to the host. Scan the Snapshot Mode barcode
to temporarily enter this mode. While in this mode the imager blinks the green LED at one-second intervals to
indicate it is not in standard operating (decode) mode.
In Snapshot Mode, the imager turns on its aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image. The next
trigger press instructs the imager to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host. A short time may pass
(less than two seconds) between when the trigger is pressed and the image is captured as the imager adjusts to
lighting conditions. Hold the imager steady until a single beep indicates that it captured the image.
If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period, the imager returns to Decode Mode. Use
Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 197 to adjust this timeout period. The default timeout period is 30 seconds.
To disable the aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode, see Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 198.
Snapshot Mode
Video Mode
In this mode the imager behaves as a video camera as long as you press the trigger. Release the trigger to return
to Decode Mode. Scan this barcode to temporarily enter Video Capture Mode.
Video Mode
193
Image Capture Preferences
Image Capture Illumination
Parameter # 361
SSI # F0h 69h
Scan Enable Image Capture Illumination to turn on illumination during every image capture. This usually results
in superior images. The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
Scan Disable Image Capture Illumination to prevent the imager from using illumination.
*Enable Image Capture Illumination
(1)
Disable Image Capture Illumination
(0)
Image Capture Autoexposure
Parameter # 360
SSI # F0h 68h
Scan Enable Image Capture Autoexposure to allow the imager to control gain settings and exposure
(integration) time to best capture an image for the selected operation mode.
Scan Disable Image Capture Autoexposure to manually adjust the gain and exposure time (see the following
pages). This option is only recommended for advanced users with difficult image capture situations.
*Enable Image Capture Autoexposure
(1)
Disable Image Capture Autoexposure
(0)
194
Image Capture Preferences
Fixed Exposure
Parameter # 567
SSI # F4h F1h 37h
Type: Word
Range: 1 - 1000
This parameter configures the exposure used in manual mode for Snapshot and Video modes.
Each integer value represents 100 μs of exposure. The default value is 100 which results in an exposure setting of
10 ms.
To set the exposure, scan the Fixed Exposure barcode, and then scan four numeric barcodes from Numeric
Barcodes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set a Fixed Exposure value of 99,
scan 0, 0, 9, 9.
Fixed Exposure
(4 digits)
195
Image Capture Preferences
Analog and Digital Gain
If you disable Image Capture Autoexposure you can modify the engine’s analog and digital gain using these
parameters. Total gain = analog gain x digital gain.
Analog Gain
Parameter # 1232
SSI # F4h D0h
Select an option to set an analog gain value.
Analog Gain x 1
(00h)
*Analog Gain x 2
(01h)
Analog Gain x 4
(02h)
Analog Gain x 8
(03h)
Digital Gain
Parameter # 1233
SSI # F4h D1h
To set the digital gain, scan the following barcode, then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes to enter a
2-digit value for the digital gain. The default is 32.
A value of 32 = x 1 digital gain; i.e., digital gain = 1/32 x digital gain parameter value.
Digital Gain
196
Image Capture Preferences
Snapshot Mode Timeout
Parameter # 323
SSI # F0h 43h
This parameter sets the amount of time the imager remains in Snapshot Mode. The imager exits Snapshot Mode
when you press the trigger, or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses. To set this timeout value, scan the Set
Snapshot Mode Timeout barcode, and then scan a barcode from Numeric Barcodes. The default value is 0 which
represents 30 seconds; values increment by 30. For example, 1 = 60 seconds, 2 = 90 seconds.
To quickly re-set the default timeout to 30 seconds, scan the 30 Seconds barcode.
If you scan No Timeout, the imager remains in Snapshot Mode until you press the trigger.
Set Snapshot Mode Timeout
*30 Seconds
No Timeout
197
Image Capture Preferences
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 300
SSI # F0h 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode.
NOTE: If enabled, the aiming pattern frames the image for aiming purposes and does not appear in the captured
image.
*Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern
(1)
Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern
(0)
Silence Operational Mode Changes
Parameter # 1293
SSI # F8h 05h 0Dh
Scan Silence Operational Mode Changes to silence the beeper when switching between operational modes
(e.g., from Decode Mode to Snapshot Mode).
Silence Operational Mode Changes (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Silence Operational Mode Changes
(Disable)
(0)
198
Image Capture Preferences
Image Cropping
Parameter # 301
SSI # F0h 2Dh
Scan the Enable Image Cropping barcode to crop a captured image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel
Addresses on page 199. Scan Disable Image Cropping to present the full 1280 x 800 pixels.
Enable Image Cropping
(1)
*Disable Image Cropping
(Use Full 1280 x 800 Pixels)
(0)
Crop to Pixel Addresses
Parameter # 315
SSI # F4h F0h 3Bh (Top)
Parameter # 316
SSI # F4h F0h 3Ch (Left)
Parameter # 317
SSI # F4h F0h 3Dh (Bottom)
Parameter # 318
SSI # F4h F0h 3Eh (Right)
If you enabled Image Cropping, set the pixel addresses from (0,0) to (1279 x 799) to crop to.
Columns are numbered from 0 to 1279, rows from 0 to 799. Specify values for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right, where
Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses, and Left and Right correspond to column pixel addresses. For
example, for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom-right section of the image, set the following values:
Top = 796, Bottom = 799, Left = 1272, Right = 1279
To set the pixel addresses, scan each of the following barcodes, and then scan four numeric barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to crop the top pixel address
to 3, scan 0, 0, 0, 3. The defaults are:
Top = 0, Bottom = 799, Left = 0, Right = 1279
NOTE: The imager has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels. Setting the cropping area to less than 4 pixels (after
resolution adjustment, see Image Size (Number of Pixels) on page 201) transfers the entire image.
199
Image Capture Preferences
Crop to Pixel Address (continued)
Top Pixel Address
(0 - 799 Decimal)
Left Pixel Address
(0 - 1279 Decimal)
Bottom Pixel Address
(0 - 799 Decimal)
Right Pixel Address
(0 - 1279 Decimal)
200
Image Capture Preferences
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
Parameter # 302
SSI # F0h 2Eh
This option alters image resolution before compression. Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel, resulting in a
smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an image size.
Table 28
Image Size
Resolution Value
Uncropped Image Size
Full
1280 x 800
1/2
640 x 400
1/4
320 x 200
*Full Resolution
(0)
1/2 Resolution
(1)
1/4 Resolution
(3)
201
Image Capture Preferences
Image Brightness (Target White)
Parameter # 390
SSI # F0h 86h
Type: Byte
Range: 1 - 240
This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot and Video Viewfinder modes when using
autoexposure. White and black are defined as 240 decimal and 1, respectively. Setting the value to the factory
default of 180 sets the white level of the image to ~180.
Scan the Image Brightness barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes from Numeric Barcodes representing
the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an Image Brightness value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
*180
Image Brightness
(3 digits)
JPEG Image Options
Parameter # 299
SSI # F0h 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to optimize JPEG images for either size or quality:
•
JPEG Quality Selector - Enter a quality value via the JPEG Quality Value parameter; the imager then
selects the corresponding image size.
•
JPEG Size Selector - Enter a size value via the JPEG Size Value parameter; the imager then selects the
best image quality.
*JPEG Quality Selector
(1)
JPEG Size Selector
(0)
202
Image Capture Preferences
JPEG Quality Value
Parameter # 305
SSI # F0h 31h
If you selected JPEG Quality Selector, scan the JPEG Quality Value barcode, and then scan three barcodes
from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an image quality value of 55, scan 0, 5, 5.
JPEG Quality Value
(Default: 065)
(5 - 100 Decimal)
JPEG Size Value
Parameter # 561
SSI # F1h 31h
Type: Word
Range: 5-350
If you selected JPEG Size Selector, scan the JPEG Size Value barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes
from Numeric Barcodes representing the target JPEG file size in kilobytes (KB). Leading zeros are required. For
example, to set an image file size value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
!
CAUTION: JPEG compression may take 10 to 15 seconds based on the amount of information in the target
image. Scanning JPEG Quality Selector (default setting) on page 202 produces a compressed
image that is consistent in quality and compression time.
JPEG Size Value
(Default: 160)
(3 digits)
203
Image Capture Preferences
Image Enhancement
Parameter # 564
SSI # F1h 34h
This parameter uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is
visually pleasing.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the level of image enhancement:
•
Off (0)
•
Low (1) - Default
•
Medium (2)
•
High (3)
Off
(0)
*Low
(1)
Medium
(2)
High
(3)
204
Image Capture Preferences
Image File Format Selector
Parameter # 304
SSI # F0h 30h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an image format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG).
The imager stores captured images in the selected format.
BMP File Format
(3)
*JPEG File Format
(1)
TIFF File Format
(4)
205
Image Capture Preferences
Image Rotation
Parameter # 665
SSI # F1h 99h
Scan one of the following barcodes to rotate the image 0, 90,180, or 270 degrees.
*Rotate 0o
(0)
Rotate 90o
(1)
Rotate 180o
(2)
Rotate 270o
(3)
206
Image Capture Preferences
Bits Per Pixel
Parameter # 303
SSI # F0h 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing
an image:
•
1 BPP - For a black and white image.
•
4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel.
•
8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE: The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
TIFF file formats only support 4 BPP and 8 BPP. Selecting 1 BPP for TIFF applies the 4 BPP option.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
*8 BPP
(2)
207
Image Capture Preferences
Signature Capture
Parameter # 93
SSI # 5Dh
A signature capture barcode is a special-purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a
document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index
to various signatures. The region inside the barcode pattern is considered the signature capture area. See
Signature Capture Code for more information.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Signature Capture.
Enable Signature Capture
(1)
*Disable Signature Capture
(0)
208
Image Capture Preferences
Signature Capture File Format Selector
Parameter # 313
SSI # F0h 39h
Decoding a signature capture barcode de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG, or
TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.
Table 29
Output File Format
File Descriptor
Output Format
(1 byte)
JPEG - 1
Signature Type (1
byte)
1-8
Signature Image Size
(4 bytes)
(BIG Endian)
0x00000400
Signature Image
0x00010203….
BMP - 3
TIFF - 4
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or
JPEG). The imager stores captured signatures in the selected format.
BMP Signature Format
(3)
*JPEG Signature Format
(1)
TIFF Signature Format
(4)
209
Image Capture Preferences
Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel
Parameter # 314
SSI # F0h 3Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a
signature:
•
1 BPP - For a black and white image.
•
4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel.
•
8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE: The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
*8 BPP
(2)
210
Image Capture Preferences
Signature Capture Width
Parameter # 366
SSI # F4h F0h 6Eh
The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the
signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area requires a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to
height.
To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width barcode, and then scan four
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 1280 decimal.
Signature Capture Width (Default: 400)
(001 - 1280 Decimal)
Signature Capture Height
Parameter # 367
SSI # F4h F0h 6Fh
To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height barcode, and then scan three
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 800 decimal.
Signature Capture Height (Default: 100)
(001 - 800 Decimal)
211
Image Capture Preferences
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
Parameter # 421
SSI # F0h A5h
Scan the JPEG Quality Value barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a
value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065)
(5 - 100 Decimal)
Video Mode Format Selector
Parameter # 916
SSI # F2h 94h
When the imager is in Video Mode, scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to send data in BMP or
JPEG format.
BMP File Format
(3)
*JPEG File Format
(1)
212
Image Capture Preferences
Video View Finder
Parameter # 324
SSI # F0h 44h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to project the video view finder while in Snapshot Mode.
Enable Video View Finder
(1)
*Disable Video View Finder
(0)
Target Video Frame Size
Parameter # 328
SSI # F0h 48h
This parameter sets the number of 100-byte blocks to transmit per second. A smaller value transmits more frames
per second but reduces video quality, while a larger value increases video quality but slows transmission.
Scan the Target Video Frame Size barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
corresponding to the 100-byte value from 800 to 20,000 bytes. For example, to select 1500 bytes, enter 0, 1, 5. To
select 900 bytes, enter 0, 0, 9. The default is 2200 bytes.
Target Video Frame Size
213
Image Capture Preferences
Video View Finder Image Size
Parameter # 329
SSI # F0h 49h
This parameter sets the number of 100-byte blocks. Values range from 800 to 12,000 bytes. A smaller value
transmits more frames per second, while a larger value increases video quality.
Scan the Video View Finder Image Size barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
corresponding to the 100-byte value from 800 to 12,000 bytes. For example, to select 1500 bytes, enter 0, 1, 5. To
select 900 bytes, enter 0, 0, 9. The default is 1700 bytes.
Video View Finder Image Size
Video Resolution
Parameter # 667
SSI # F1h 9Bh
This parameter alters the video resolution before transmission. Rows and columns are removed from the image,
resulting in a smaller video image containing the original content with reduced resolution.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a value:
Table 30
Resolution and Video Image Sizes
Resolution Value
Video Image Size
Full
1280 x 800
1/2
640 x 400
1/4
320 x 200
Full Resolution
(0)
1/2 Resolution
(1)
*1/4 Resolution
(3)
214
Symbologies
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes
symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 31 on page 216 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up
beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option
Option value
215
Symbologies
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit barcode data without the
UPC-A check digit, scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit barcode under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on
page 234. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter
entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Symbology Parameter Defaults
Table 31 lists defaults for all symbology parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall the default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 31
Symbology Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Enable/Disable All Code Types
Page
Number
223
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
1
01h
Enable
224
UPC-E
2
02h
Enable
224
UPC-E1
12
0Ch
Disable
225
EAN-8/JAN 8
4
04h
Enable
225
EAN-13/JAN 13
3
03h
Enable
226
Bookland EAN
83
53h
Disable
226
Bookland ISBN Format
576
F1h 40h
ISBN-10
227
ISSN EAN
617
F1h 69h
Disable
228
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits)
16
10h
Ignore
229
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
216
Symbologies
Table 31
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2
User-Programmable Supplementals
Default
Page
Number
000
232
Supplemental 1:
579
F4h F1h 43h
Supplemental 2:
580
F4h F1h 44h
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
80
50h
10
232
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental
AIM ID
672
F1h A0h
Combined
233
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
40
28h
Enable
234
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
41
29h
Enable
234
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
42
2Ah
Enable
235
UPC-A Preamble
34
22h
System Character
236
UPC-E Preamble
35
23h
System Character
237
UPC-E1 Preamble
36
24h
System Character
238
Convert UPC-E to A
37
25h
Disable
239
Convert UPC-E1 to A
38
26h
Disable
239
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
39
27h
Disable
240
UCC Coupon Extended Code
85
55h
Disable
240
Coupon Report
730
F1h DAh
New Coupon
Format
241
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
1289
F8h 05h 09h
Disable
242
Code 128
8
08h
Enable
242
Set Length(s) for Code 128
209, 210
D1h, D2h
Any Length
243
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
14
0Eh
Enable
244
ISBT 128
84
54h
Enable
245
ISBT Concatenation
577
F1h 41h
Disable
246
Code 128
Enable for
DS4608-HC
Check ISBT Table
578
F1h 42h
Enable
247
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
223
DFh
10
247
Code 128 <FNC4>
1254
F8h 04h E6h
Honor
248
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
217
Symbologies
Table 31
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Code 128 Security Level
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2
751
F1h EFh
Default
Security Level 1
Page
Number
249
Security Level 2 for
DS4608-HC
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
1208
F8h 04h B8h
Disable
250
Code 39
0
00h
Enable
250
Trioptic Code 39
13
0Dh
Disable
251
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(Italian Pharmacy Code)
86
56h
Disable
251
Code 32 Prefix
231
E7h
Disable
252
Set Length(s) for Code 39
18, 19
12h, 13h
1 to 55
252
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
48
30h
Disable
254
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
43
2Bh
Disable
254
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
17
11h
Disable
255
Code 39 Security Level
750
F1h EEh
Security Level 1
256
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
1209
F8h 04h B9h
Disable
258
Code 93
9
09h
Enable
258
Set Length(s) for Code 93
26, 27
1Ah, 1Bh
1 to 55
259
Code 11
10
0Ah
Disable
261
Set Lengths for Code 11
28, 29
1Ch, 1Dh
4 to 55
261
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
52
34h
Disable
263
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
47
2Fh
Disable
264
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
6
06h
Enable
264
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5
22, 23
16h, 17h
6 to 55
265
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
49
31h
Disable
267
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
44
2Ch
Disable
267
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13
82
52h
Disable
268
Code 39
Code 93
Code 11
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
218
Symbologies
Table 31
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2
Febraban
1750
F8h 06h D6h
Disable
268
I 2 of 5 Security Level
1121
F8h 04h 61h
Security Level 1
269
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
1210
F8h 04h BAh
Disable
270
Discrete 2 of 5
5
05h
Disable
270
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5
20, 21
14h 15h
1 to 55
271
Codabar
7
07h
Enable
273
Set Lengths for Codabar
24, 25
18h, 19h
4 to 55
273
CLSI Editing
54
36h
Disable
275
NOTIS Editing
55
37h
Disable
275
Codabar Security Level
1776
F8h 06h F0h
Security Level 1
276
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/
Stop Characters Detection
855
F2h 57h
Upper Case
277
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification
1784
F8h 06h F8h
Disable
277
Transmit Codabar Check Digit
704
F1h C0h
Disable
278
MSI
11
0Bh
Disable
278
Set Length(s) for MSI
30, 31
1Eh, 1Fh
4 to 55
279
MSI Check Digits
50
32h
One
280
Transmit MSI Check Digit
46
2Eh
Disable
281
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
51
33h
Mod 10/Mod 10
281
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
1392
F8h 05h 70h
Disable
282
408
F0h 98h
Disable
282
Matrix 2 of 5
618
F1h 6Ah
Disable
283
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths
619
620
F1h 6Bh
F1h 6Ch
4 to 55
283
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
622
F1h 6Eh
Disable
285
Parameter
Default
Page
Number
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Codabar (NW - 7)
MSI
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
219
Symbologies
Table 31
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2
623
F1h 6Fh
Disable
285
Korean 3 of 5
581
F1h 45h
Disable
286
Inverse 1D
586
F1h 4Ah
Regular
287
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
338
F0h 52h
Enable
288
GS1 DataBar Limited
339
F0h 53h
Enable
288
GS1 DataBar Expanded
340
F0h 54h
Enable
289
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
397
F0h 8Dh
Disable
289
GS1 DataBar Security Level
1706
F8h 06h AAh
Level 1
290
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check
728
F1h D8h
Level 3
291
Redundancy Level
78
4Eh
1
293
Security Level
77
4Dh
1
295
1D Quiet Zone Level
1288
F8h 05h 08h
1
296
Intercharacter Gap Size
381
F0h 7Dh
Normal
297
Composite CC-C
341
F0h 55h
Disable
298
Composite CC-A/B
342
F0h 56h
Disable
298
Composite TLC-39
371
F0h 73h
Disable
299
Composite Inverse
1113
F8h 04h 59h
Regular
299
UPC Composite Mode
344
F0h 58h
UPC Never Linked
300
Composite Beep Mode
398
F0h 8Eh
Beep As Each
Code Type is
Decoded
301
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN
Composite Codes
427
F0h ABh
Disable
302
Parameter
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
Default
Page
Number
Korean 3 of 5
GS1 DataBar
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Composite Codes
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
220
Symbologies
Table 31
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2
PDF417
15
0Fh
Enable
303
MicroPDF417
227
E3h
Disable
303
Code 128 Emulation
123
7Bh
Disable
304
Data Matrix
292
F0h 24h
Enable
305
GS1 Data Matrix
1336
F8h 05h 38h
Disable
305
Data Matrix Inverse
588
F1h 4Ch
Inverse Autodetect
306
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images
537
F1h 19h
Auto
307
Maxicode
294
F0h 26h
Disable
308
QR Code
293
F0h 25h
Enable
309
GS1 QR
1343
F8h 05h 3Fh
Enable
309
MicroQR
573
F1h 3Dh
Enable
310
Linked QR Mode
1847
737h
Linked QR Only
311
Aztec
574
F1h 3Eh
Enable
312
Aztec Inverse
589
F1h 4Dh
Inverse Autodetect
313
Han Xin
1167
F8h 04h 8Fh
Disable
314
Han Xin Inverse
1168
F8h 04h 90h
Regular
315
Grid Matrix
1718
F8h 06h B6h
Disable
316
Grid Matrix Inverse
1719
F8h 06h B7h
Regular
317
Grid Matrix Mirror
1736
F8h 06h C8h
Regular Only
318
DotCode
1906
F8 07 72h
Disable
319
DotCode Inverse
1907
F8 07 73h
Inverse Autodetect
320
DotCode Mirrored
1908
F8 07 74h
Autodetect
321
DotCode Prioritize
1937
F8 07 91h
Enable
322
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
N/A
N/A
N/A
323
Abort Macro PDF Entry
N/A
N/A
N/A
323
89
59h
Disable
324
Parameter
Default
Page
Number
2D Symbologies
Macro PDF
Postal Codes
US Postnet
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
221
Symbologies
Table 31
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2
US Planet
90
5Ah
Disable
324
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
95
5Fh
Enable
325
UK Postal
91
5Bh
Disable
325
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
96
60h
Enable
326
Japan Postal
290
F0h 22h
Disable
326
Australia Post
291
F0h 23h
Disable
327
Australia Post Format
718
F1h CEh
Autodiscriminate
328
Netherlands KIX Code
326
F0h 46h
Disable
329
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
592
F1h 50h
Disable
329
UPU FICS Postal
611
F1h 63h
Disable
330
Mailmark
1337
F8h 05h 39h
Disable
330
Parameter
Default
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
222
Page
Number
Symbologies
Enable/Disable All Code Types
Scan the Disable All Code Types barcode to disable all symbologies. This is useful when enabling only a few
code types.
Scan Enable All Code Types to enable all symbologies. This is useful if you need to disable only a few code
types.
Disable All Code Types
Enable All Code Types
223
Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
Parameter # 1
SSI # 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-A.
*Enable UPC-A
(1)
Disable UPC-A
(0)
UPC-E
Parameter # 2
SSI # 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E.
*Enable UPC-E
(1)
Disable UPC-E
(0)
224
Symbologies
UPC-E1
Parameter # 12
SSI # 0Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E1.
NOTE: UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable UPC-E1
(1)
*Disable UPC-E1
(0)
EAN-8/JAN-8
Parameter # 4
SSI # 04h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8.
*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(1)
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
(0)
225
Symbologies
EAN-13/JAN-13
Parameter # 3
SSI # 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13.
*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(1)
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
(0)
Bookland EAN
Parameter # 83
SSI # 53h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Bookland EAN.
Enable Bookland EAN
(1)
*Disable Bookland EAN
(0)
NOTE: If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format. Also set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplementals on page 229 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only,
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.
226
Symbologies
Bookland ISBN Format
Parameter # 576
SSI # F1h 40h
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 226, select one of the following formats for Bookland
data:
•
Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with
the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered
Bookland in this mode.
•
Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in
13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
*Bookland ISBN-10
(0)
Bookland ISBN-13
(1)
NOTE: For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 226,
and then set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 229 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with
Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979
Supplemental Mode.
227
Symbologies
ISSN EAN
Parameter # 617
SSI # F1h 69h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable ISSN EAN.
Enable ISSN EAN
(1)
*Disable ISSN EAN
(0)
228
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
Parameter # 16
SSI # 10h
Supplementals are barcodes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN
13+2). The following options are available:
•
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only - The scanner only decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols
with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
•
Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals - When presented with a UPC/EAN/JAN plus supplemental
symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
•
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals - The scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols
with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must
decode the barcode the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 232
before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
Select one of the following Supplemental Mode options to immediately transmit EAN-13 barcodes starting
with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner
must decode the barcode the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 232
before transmitting the data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN/JAN
barcodes that do not have that prefix immediately.
•
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
•
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
NOTE: If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN barcodes, see Bookland
EAN on page 226 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page
227.
•
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
•
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
•
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
•
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any prefix listed
previously.
•
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with a 3-digit
user-defined prefix. Set this using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 232.
•
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with either
of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on page
232.
•
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any
prefix listed previously or the prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 232.
•
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with
any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable
Supplementals on page 232.
NOTE: To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental
characters.
229
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals Only
(1)
*Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(0)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with
Supplementals
(2)
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
(4)
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
(5)
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
(7)
230
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
(6)
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
(8)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode
(3)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1
(9)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2
(10)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1
(11)
Smart Supplemental Plus
User-Programmable 1 and 2
(12)
231
Symbologies
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579
SSI # F4h F1h 43h
Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580
SSI # F4h F1h 44h
If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page
229, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 1, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes to set
the 3-digit prefix. To set a second 3-digit prefix, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 2, and then scan three
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes. The default is 000 (zeroes).
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
User-Programmable Supplemental 2
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
Parameter # 80
SSI # 50h
If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals, this option sets the number of times to
decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to 30. Five or above is
recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals.
The default is 10.
To set a redundancy value, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes.
Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
232
Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format
Parameter # 672
SSI # F1h A0h
If Transmit Code ID Character on page 179 is set to AIM Code ID Character, scan one of the following barcodes to
select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes with supplementals:
•
Separate - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs but one transmission, i.e.,
]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
•
•
Combined – Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with one AIM ID and one transmission, i.e.,
]E3<data+supplemental data>
Separate Transmissions - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate
transmissions, i.e.,
]E<0 or 4><data>
]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
Separate
(0)
*Combined
(1)
Separate Transmissions
(2)
233
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
Parameter # 40
SSI # 28h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following
barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the
integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(0)
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
Parameter # 41
SSI # 29h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following
barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the
integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(0)
234
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
Parameter # 42
SSI # 2Ah
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following
barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the
integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(0)
235
Symbologies
UPC-A Preamble
Parameter # 34
SSI # 22h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the
appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to match the host system:
•
Transmit System Character only
•
Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)
•
Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
236
Symbologies
UPC-E Preamble
Parameter # 35
SSI # 23h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the
appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to match the host system:
•
Transmit System Character only
•
Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)
•
Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
237
Symbologies
UPC-E1 Preamble
Parameter # 36
SSI # 24h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the
appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to match the host system:
•
Transmit System Character only
•
Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)
•
Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
238
Symbologies
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Parameter # 37
SSI # 25h
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After
conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,
Check Digit).
Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
Parameter # 38
SSI # 26h
Scan Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections
(e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Scan Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable) to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without
conversion.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
239
Symbologies
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
Parameter # 39
SSI # 27h
Scan Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them
compatible in length to EAN-13 symbols. Scan Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(1)
*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(0)
UCC Coupon Extended Code
Parameter # 85
SSI # 55h
Scan Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code to decode UPC-A barcodes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 barcodes
starting with digit ‘99’, and UPC-A/GS1-128 coupon codes. UPC-A, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to
use this feature.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(1)
*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(0)
NOTE: See UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 232 to control autodiscrimination of the
GS1-128 portion (right half) of a coupon code.
240
Symbologies
Coupon Report
Parameter # 730
SSI # F1h DAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the type of coupon format to support.
•
Old Coupon Format - Support UPC-A/GS1-128 and EAN-13/GS1-128.
•
New Coupon Format - An interim format to support UPC-A/GS1-DataBar and EAN-13/GS1-DataBar.
•
Autodiscriminate Format - Support both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format.
Old Coupon Format
(0)
*New Coupon Format
(1)
Autodiscriminate Coupon Format
(2)
241
Symbologies
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1289
SSI # F8h 05h 09h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding UPC barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the
margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 296.
Enable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*Disable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 128
Parameter # 8
SSI # 08h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128.
*Enable Code 128
(1)
Disable Code 128
(0)
242
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128
L1 = Parameter # 209
SSI # D1h
L2 = Parameter # 210
SSI # D2h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The maximum range is 128. The default is Any Length.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change
the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode Code 128 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan Code 128 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error
or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Any Length - Decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
Code 128 - One Discrete Length
Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths
243
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)
Code 128 - Length Within Range
*Code 128 - Any Length
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
Parameter # 14
SSI # 0Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1-128.
*Enable GS1-128
(1)
Disable GS1-128
(0)
244
Symbologies
ISBT 128
Parameter # 84
SSI # 54h
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or
disable ISBT 128.
*Enable ISBT 128
(1)
Disable ISBT 128
(0)
245
Symbologies
ISBT Concatenation
Parameter # 577
SSI # F1h 41h
Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:
•
Enable ISBT Concatenation - There must be two ISBT codes in order for the scanner to decode and
perform concatenation. The scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols.
•
Disable ISBT Concatenation - The scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it
encounters.
•
Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation - The scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes
immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the scanner must decode the symbol the number of
times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 247 before transmitting its data to confirm that
there is no additional ISBT symbol.
NOTE: When enabling ISBT Concatenation or Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation set Code 128 Security
Level to Level 2.
*Enable ISBT Concatenation
(1)
(Default for DS4608-HC only)
*Disable ISBT Concatenation
(0)
Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation
(2)
246
Symbologies
Check ISBT Table
Parameter # 578
SSI # F1h 42h
The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT barcodes that are commonly used in pairs.
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this
table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.
*Enable Check ISBT Table
(1)
Disable Check ISBT Table
(0)
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
Parameter # 223
SSI # DFh
If you set ISBT Concatenation on page 246 to Autodiscriminate (the default), use this parameter to set the
number of times the scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan barcodes in Numeric Barcodes to set a value between 2 and 20. Enter
a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 452. The
default is 10.
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
247
Symbologies
Code 128 <FNC4>
Parameter # 1254
SSI # F8h 04h E6h
This feature applies to Code 128 barcodes with an embedded <FNC4> character. Select Ignore Code 128
<FNC4> to strip the <FNC4> character from the decode data. The remaining characters are sent to the host
unchanged. When disabled, the <FNC4> character is processed normally as per Code 128 standard.
*Honor Code 128 <FNC4>
(0)
Ignore Code 128 <FNC4>
(1)
248
Symbologies
Code 128 Security Level
Parameter # 751
SSI # F1h EFh
Code 128 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when Code 128 Lengths is set to Any Length. The
scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 128 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between
security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so
select only the level of security necessary.
•
Code 128 Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
•
Code 128 Security Level 1 - This option eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable
aggressiveness.
•
Code 128 Security Level 2 - This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level
1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
•
Code 128 Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and
significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve
the quality of the barcodes.
Code 128 Security Level 0
(0)
*Code 128 Security Level 1
(1)
*Code 128 Security Level 2
(2)
(Default for DS4608-HC only)
Code 128 Security Level 3
(3)
249
Symbologies
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1208
SSI # F8h 04h B8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 128 barcodes with reduced quiet zones
(the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 296.
Enable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*Disable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 39
Parameter # 0
SSI # 00h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 39.
*Enable Code 39
(1)
Disable Code 39
(0)
250
Symbologies
Trioptic Code 39
Parameter # 13
SSI # 0Dh
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols
always contain six characters. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable
Trioptic Code 39.
Enable Trioptic Code 39
(1)
*Disable Trioptic Code 39
(0)
NOTE: You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
Parameter # 86
SSI # 56h
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to
enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.
NOTE: Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(1)
*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(0)
251
Symbologies
Code 32 Prefix
Parameter # 231
SSI # E7h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 barcodes.
NOTE: Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Code 32 Prefix
(1)
*Disable Code 32 Prefix
(0)
Set Lengths for Code 39
L1 = Parameter # 18
SSI # 12h
L2 = Parameter # 19
SSI # 13h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within Range or Any Length are the preferred options. The
maximum range is 80. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols
252
Symbologies
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode Code 39 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan Code 39 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or
change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Any Length - Decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
Code 39 - One Discrete Length
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Code 39 - Length Within Range
(Default: 1 to 55)
Code 39 - Any Length
253
Symbologies
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 48
SSI # 30h
Scan Enable Code 39 Check Digit to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies
with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded.
Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Enable Code 39 Check Digit
(1)
*Disable Code 39 Check Digit
(0)
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
Parameter # 43
SSI # 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)
(0)
NOTE: Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
254
Symbologies
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Parameter # 17
SSI # 11h
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. Scan one
of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII.
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII
(1)
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
(0)
NOTES 1You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
2. Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the
ASCII character set table for the appropriate interface. See Table 38 on page 471.
255
Symbologies
Code 39 Security Level
Parameter # 750
SSI # F1h EEh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 39 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between
security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so
select only the level of security necessary.
•
Code 39 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
•
Code 39 Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
•
Code 39 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1
fails to eliminate misdecodes.
•
Code 39 Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and
significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve
the quality of the barcodes
256
Symbologies
Code 39 Security Level (continued)
Code 39 Security Level 0
(0)
*Code 39 Security Level 1
(1)
Code 39 Security Level 2
(2)
Code 39 Security Level 3
(3)
257
Symbologies
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1209
SSI # F8h 04h B9h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 39 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the
margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 296.
Enable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*Disable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 93
Parameter # 9
SSI # 09h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 93.
*Enable Code 93
(1)
Disable Code 93
(0)
258
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 93
L1 = Parameter # 26
SSI # 1Ah
L2 = Parameter # 27
SSI # 1Bh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The maximum range is 80. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode Code 93 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan Code 93 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or
change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Any Length - Decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
259
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)
Code 93 - One Discrete Length
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Code 93 - Length Within Range
(Default: 1 to 55)
Code 93 - Any Length
260
Symbologies
Code 11
Parameter # 10
SSI # 0Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 11
Enable Code 11
(1)
*Disable Code 11
(0)
Set Lengths for Code 11
L1 = Parameter # 28
SSI # 1Ch
L2 = Parameter # 29
SSI # 1Dh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The maximum range is 80. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode Code 11 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan Code 11 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or
change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Any Length - Decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
261
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)
Code 11 - One Discrete Length
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Code 11 - Length Within Range
(Default: 4 to 55)
Code 11 - Any Length
262
Symbologies
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 52
SSI # 34h
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with
the specified check digit algorithm.
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols, or to
disable this feature.
*Disable
(0)
One Check Digit
(1)
Two Check Digits
(2)
263
Symbologies
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits
Parameter # 47
SSI # 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0)
NOTE: Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Parameter # 6
SSI # 06h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5.
*Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(1)
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
(0)
264
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 22
SSI # 16h
L2 = Parameter # 23
SSI # 17h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The maximum range is 80. The default is Length Within Range: 6 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters,
scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection,
scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either
2 or 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error
or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12
characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change
the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
265
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)
•
Any Length - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
NOTE: Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of
the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5
applications, or increase the I 2 of 5 Security Level on page 269.
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
*I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
(Default: 6 to 55)
I 2 of 5 - Any Length
266
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 49
SSI # 31h
Scan one of the following barcodes to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with
either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check
digit algorithm.
*Disable
(0)
USS Check Digit
(1)
OPCC Check Digit
(2)
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 44
SSI # 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)
(0)
267
Symbologies
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Parameter # 82
SSI # 52h
Scan Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the
host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and
a valid EAN-13 check digit.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)
(0)
Febraban
Parameter # 1750
SSI # F8h 06h D6h
Febraban is an Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode of length 44 that requires inserting special check characters in the
transmitted data stream. Enabling this disables the I 2 of 5 internal check digit calculation and transmission.
Recommendations for length settings:
•
Interleaved 2 of 5 Length 1: Larger of the fixed length and the Febraban length (==44).
•
Interleaved 2 of 5 Length 2: Smaller of the fixed length and the Febraban length (==44).
Enable Febraban
(1)
*Disable Febraban
(0)
268
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Security Level
Parameter # 1121
SSI # F8h 04h 61h
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when I 2 of 5 Lengths is set to Any Length.
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship
between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning
aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
•
I 2 of 5 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
•
I 2 of 5 Security Level 1: A barcode must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety
requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
•
I 2 of 5 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1
fails to eliminate misdecodes.
•
I 2 of 5 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security
level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A barcode must be successfully read three times
before being decoded.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and
significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve
the quality of the barcodes.
I 2 of 5 Security Level 0
(0)
*I 2 of 5 Security Level 1
(1)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 2
(2)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 3
(3)
269
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1210
SSI # F8h 04h BAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding I 2 of 5 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the
margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 296.
Enable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*Disable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Parameter # 5
SSI # 05h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5.
Enable Discrete 2 of 5
(1)
*Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(0)
270
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 20
SSI # 14h
L2 = Parameter # 21
SSI # 15h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The maximum range is 55. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters,
scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection,
scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either
2 or 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or
change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
271
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
•
Any Length - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
NOTE: Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of
the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5
applications.
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
*D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
(Default: 1 to 55)
D 2 of 5 - Any Length
272
Symbologies
Codabar (NW - 7)
Parameter # 7
SSI # 07h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Codabar.
*Enable Codabar
(1)
Disable Codabar
(0)
Set Lengths for Codabar
L1 = Parameter # 24
SSI # 18h
L2 = Parameter # 25
SSI # 19h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The maximum range is 60. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14
characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing
either 2 or 14 characters, scan Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct
an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode Codabar symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan Codabar - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error
or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Any Length - Decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
273
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)
Codabar - One Discrete Length
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths
*Codabar - Length Within Range
(Default: 4 to 55)
Codabar - Any Length
274
Symbologies
CLSI Editing
Parameter # 54
SSI # 36h
Scan Enable CLSI Editing to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth
characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
NOTE: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
Enable CLSI Editing
(1)
*Disable CLSI Editing
(0)
NOTIS Editing
Parameter # 55
SSI # 37h
Scan Enable NOTIS Editing to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol if the host
system requires this data format.
Enable NOTIS Editing
(1)
*Disable NOTIS Editing
(0)
275
Symbologies
Codabar Security Level
Parameter # 1776
SSI # F8h 06h F0h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Codabar barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between
security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so
select only the level of security necessary.
•
Codabar Security Level 0: This setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
•
Codabar Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
•
Codabar Security Level 2: Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security
Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
•
Codabar Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and
significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve
the quality of the barcodes.
Codabar Security Level 0
(0)
*Codabar Security Level 1
(1)
Codabar Security Level 2
(2)
Codabar Security Level 3
(3)
276
Symbologies
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters
Parameter # 855
SSI # F2h 57h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start/stop
characters.
Lower Case
(1)
*Upper Case
(0)
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 1784
SSI # F8h 06h F8h
Enable this feature to check the Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit to verify that the data complies with the specified
check digit algorithm.
Enable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit
(1)
* Disable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit
(0)
277
Symbologies
Transmit Codabar Check Digit
Parameter # 704
SSI # F1h C0h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Codabar check digit(s).
NOTE: Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Codabar Check Digit Transmission
(1)
* Disable Codabar Check Digit Transmission
(0)
MSI
Parameter # 11
SSI # 0Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MSI.
Enable MSI
(1)
*Disable MSI
(0)
278
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI
L1 = Parameter # 30
SSI # 1Eh
L2 = Parameter # 31
SSI # 1Fh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
The maximum range is 55. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on
page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only MSI symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2
or 14 characters, scan MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or
change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode MSI symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12
characters, scan MSI - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change
the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Any Length - Decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
NOTE: Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this,
select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.
MSI - One Discrete Length
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths
279
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
*MSI - Length Within Range
(Default: 4 to 55)
MSI - Any Length
MSI Check Digits
Parameter # 50
SSI # 32h
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is
optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits barcode to enable verification
of the second check digit.
•
0 - Does not check the MSI check digit; decodes MSI with no check digit.
•
1 - This is for MSI barcodes with one check digit. This is the default.
•
2 - This is for MSI barcodes with two check digits.
See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 281 to select second digit algorithms.
No MSI Check Digit
(0)
*One MSI Check Digit
(1)
Two MSI Check Digits
(2)
280
Symbologies
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
Parameter # 46
SSI # 2Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(1)
*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0)
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
Parameter # 51
SSI # 33h
Two algorithms are available for verifying the second MSI check digit. Scan one of the following barcodes to select
the algorithm used to encode the check digit.
MOD 11/MOD 10
(0)
*MOD 10/MOD 10
(1)
281
Symbologies
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1392
SSI # F8h 05h 70h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding MSI barcodes with reduced quiet zones. If you
select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 296.
*Disable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Enable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
Chinese 2 of 5
Parameter # 408
SSI # F0h 98h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5.
Enable Chinese 2 of 5
(1)
*Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(0)
282
Symbologies
Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # 618
SSI # F1h 6Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5
(1)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(0)
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 619
SSI # F1h 6Bh
L2 = Parameter # 620
SSI # F1h 6Ch
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a
specific range. The maximum range is 80. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
•
One Discrete Length - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14
characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change
the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1,
4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
•
Length Within Range - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To
correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 452.
283
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 (continued)
•
Any Length - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
(Default: 4 to 55)
Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length
284
Symbologies
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 622
SSI # F1h 6Eh
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following
barcodes to determine whether to include the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit with the barcode data.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(1)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 623
SSI # F1h 6Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(1)
*Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
285
Symbologies
Korean 3 of 5
Parameter # 581
SSI # F1h 45h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Korean 3 of 5.
NOTE: The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.
Enable Korean 3 of 5
(1)
*Disable Korean 3 of 5
(0)
286
Symbologies
Inverse 1D
Parameter # 586
SSI # F1h 4Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the 1D inverse decoder setting:
•
Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular 1D barcodes only.
•
Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse 1D barcodes only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D barcodes.
NOTES 1 This parameter does not apply to GS1 DataBarcode types.
2. The Inverse 1D setting may impact Composite or Inverse Composite decoding.
See Composite Inverse on page 299.
*Regular
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Inverse Autodetect
(2)
287
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar
The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar Omnidirectional, DataBar Limited, and DataBar Expanded. The limited
and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate barcodes to enable or disable each variant of
GS1 DataBar.
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)
Parameter # 338
SSI # F0h 52h
*Enable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
(0)
GS1 DataBar Limited
Parameter # 339
SSI # F0h 53h
*Enable GS1 DataBar Limited
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Limited
(0)
288
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Expanded
Parameter # 340
SSI # F0h 54h
*Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(0)
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
Parameter # 397
SSI # F0h, 8Dh
This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as
part of a Composite symbol. Scan Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN to strip the leading '010' from
DataBar Omnidirectional and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the
barcode as EAN-13.
For barcodes beginning with between two and five zeros, this strips the leading '0100' and reports the barcode as
UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble option that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted
barcodes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
(1)
*Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
(0)
289
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Security Level
Parameter # 1706
SSI # F8h 06h AAh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar
Limited, GS1 DataBar Expanded) barcodes.
•
Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security
decoding most in-spec barcodes.
•
Security Level 1 - This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness.
•
Security Level 2 - Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to
eliminate misdecodes.
•
Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
GS1 DataBar Security Level 0
(0)
*GS1 DataBar Security Level 1
(1)
GS1 DataBar Security Level 2
(2)
GS1 DataBar Security Level 3
(3)
290
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check
Parameter # 728
SSI # F1h D8h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited barcodes. There is an inverse
relationship between the level of margin check and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of margin check
can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of margin check necessary.
•
Margin Check Level 1 – No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet can
result in erroneous decoding of a DataBar Limited barcode when scanning some UPC symbols that start
with digits 9 and 7.
•
Margin Check Level 2 – Automatic risk detection. This level of margin check can result in erroneous
decoding of DataBar Limited barcodes when scanning some UPC symbols. If a misdecode is detected, the
scanner operates in Level 3 or Level 1.
•
Margin Check Level 3 – Margin check level reflects the newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a five
times trailing clear margin.
•
Margin Check Level 4 – Margin check level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of
margin check requires a five times leading and trailing clear margin.
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 1
(1)
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 2
(2)
*GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 3
(3)
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 4
(4)
291
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Expanded Security Level
Parameter # 1707
SSI # F8h 06h ABh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Expanded barcodes.
•
Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security
decoding most in-spec barcodes.
•
Security Level 1 - This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness.
•
Security Level 2 - Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to
eliminate misdecodes.
•
Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
GS1 DataBar Expanded Security Level 0
(0)
*GS1 DataBar Expanded Security Level 1
(1)
GS1 DataBar Expanded Security Level 2
(2)
GS1 DataBar Expanded Security Level 3
(3)
292
Symbologies
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
Parameter # 78
SSI # 4Eh
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of
barcode quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the redundancy level appropriate for the barcode quality:
•
Redundancy Level 1 - The scanner must read the following code types twice before decoding:
• Codabar (8 characters or less)
• MSI (4 characters or less)
• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
•
Redundancy Level 2 - The scanner must read all code types twice before decoding.
•
Redundancy Level 3 - The scanner must read code types other than the following twice before decoding,
but must read the following codes three times:
• Codabar (8 characters or less)
• MSI (4 characters or less)
• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
•
Redundancy Level 4 - The scanner must read all code types three times before decoding.
293
Symbologies
Redundancy Level (continued)
*Redundancy Level 1
(1)
Redundancy Level 2
(2)
Redundancy Level 3
(3)
Redundancy Level 4
(4)
294
Symbologies
Security Level
Parameter # 77
SSI # 4Dh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta barcodes, which include the Code 128 family,
UPC/EAN/JAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of barcode quality. There is
an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security
necessary for the application.
•
Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security
decoding most in-spec barcodes.
•
Security Level 1 - This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
•
Security Level 2 - Select this option if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
•
Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and
significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve
the quality of the barcodes.
Security Level 0
(0)
*Security Level 1
(1)
Security Level 2
(2)
Security Level 3
(3)
295
Symbologies
1D Quiet Zone Level
Parameter # 1288
SSI # F8h 05h 08h
This feature sets the level of aggressiveness when decoding barcodes with a reduced quiet zone (the margin on
either side of a barcode), and applies to symbologies enabled by a Reduced Quiet Zone parameter. Because
higher levels increase the decoding time and risk of misdecodes, Zebra strongly recommends enabling only the
symbologies which require higher quiet zone levels, and leaving Reduced Quiet Zone disabled for all other
symbologies. Options are:
•
1D Quiet Zone Level 0 - The scanner performs normally in terms of quiet zone.
•
1D Quiet Zone Level 1 - The scanner performs more aggressively in terms of quiet zone.
•
1D Quiet Zone Level 2 - The scanner only requires a quiet zone at the end of barcode for decoding.
•
1D Quiet Zone Level 3 - The scanner decodes anything in terms of quiet zone or end of barcode.
1D Quiet Zone Level 0
(0)
*1D Quiet Zone Level 1
(1)
1D Quiet Zone Level 2
(2)
1D Quiet Zone Level 3
(3)
296
Symbologies
Intercharacter Gap Size
Parameter # 381
SSI # F0h, 7Dh
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various
barcode printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the scanner
from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these
out-of-specification barcodes.
*Normal Intercharacter Gaps
(6)
Large Intercharacter Gaps
(10)
297
Symbologies
Composite
Composite CC-C
Parameter # 341
SSI # F0h 55h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-C.
Enable CC-C
(1)
*Disable CC-C
(0)
Composite CC-A/B
Parameter # 342
SSI # F0h 56h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-A/B.
Enable CC-A/B
(1)
*Disable CC-A/B
(0)
298
Symbologies
Composite TLC-39
Parameter # 371
SSI # F0h 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type TLC-39.
Enable TLC39
(1)
*Disable TLC39
(0)
Composite Inverse
Parameter # 1113
SSI # F8h 04h 59h
Select an option to set Composite for either regular decode or inverse decode.
•
Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Composite barcodes only. Before selecting this, set Inverse
1D on page 287 to Regular Only or Inverse Autodetect.
•
Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Composite barcodes only. This mode only supports
Composite Inverse that includes DataBar combined with CCAB, and does not support other 1D/2D
combinations. Before selecting this, first enable Composite CC-A/B on page 298, and set Inverse 1D on
page 287 to Inverse Only or Inverse Autodetect.
*Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
299
Symbologies
UPC Composite Mode
Parameter # 344
SSI # F0h 58h
Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:
•
UPC Never Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.
•
UPC Always Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes and the 2D portion. If 2D is not present, do not transmit the
barcode.
•
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites - The scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the
UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.
*UPC Never Linked
(0)
UPC Always Linked
(1)
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites
(2)
300
Symbologies
Composite Beep Mode
Parameter # 398
SSI # F0h, 8Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of decode beeps that sound upon decoding a Composite
barcode.
Single Beep After Both are Decoded
(0)
*Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded
(1)
Double Beep After Both are Decoded
(2)
301
Symbologies
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes
Parameter # 427
SSI # F0h, ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable this mode.
Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(1)
*Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(0)
302
Symbologies
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Parameter # 15
SSI # 0Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable PDF417.
*Enable PDF417
(1)
Disable PDF417
(0)
MicroPDF417
Parameter # 227
SSI # E3h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroPDF417.
Enable MicroPDF417
(1)
*Disable MicroPDF417
(0)
303
Symbologies
Code 128 Emulation
Parameter # 123
SSI # 7Bh
Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. You must enable AIM
Code ID Character (1) on page 179 for this parameter to work.
Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]C1if the first codeword is 903-905
]C2if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]L3if the first codeword is 903-905
]L4if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.
NOTE: Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites
instead.
Enable Code 128 Emulation
(1)
*Disable Code 128 Emulation
(0)
304
Symbologies
Data Matrix
Parameter # 292
SSI # F0h, 24h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Data Matrix.
*Enable Data Matrix
(1)
Disable Data Matrix
(0)
GS1 Data Matrix
Parameter # 1336
SSI # F8h 05h 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 Data Matrix.
Enable GS1 Data Matrix
(1)
*Disable GS1 Data Matrix
(0)
305
Symbologies
Data Matrix Inverse
Parameter # 588
SSI # F1h 4Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting:
•
Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Data Matrix barcodes only.
•
Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix barcodes only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix barcodes.
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
*Inverse Autodetect
(2)
306
Symbologies
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images
Parameter # 537
SSI # F1h 19h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix barcodes:
•
Never - Do not decode Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images.
•
Always - Decode only Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images.
•
Auto - Decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix barcodes.
Never
(0)
Always
(1)
*Auto
(2)
307
Symbologies
Maxicode
Parameter # 294
SSI # F0h, 26h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Maxicode.
Enable Maxicode
(1)
*Disable Maxicode
(0)
308
Symbologies
QR Code
Parameter # 293
SSI # F0h, 25h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable QR Code.
NOTE: Enabling this also enables Linked QR Mode.
*Enable QR Code
(1)
Disable QR Code
(0)
GS1 QR
Parameter # 1343
SSI # F8h 05h 3Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 QR.
*Enable GS1 QR
(1)
Disable GS1 QR
(0)
309
Symbologies
MicroQR
Parameter # 573
SSI # F1h 3Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroQR.
*Enable MicroQR
(1)
Disable MicroQR
(0)
310
Symbologies
Linked QR Mode
Parameter # 1847
SSI # 737h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a linked QR mode:
•
Linked QR Only - The scanner does not decode individual QR symbols from a set of linked QR codes.
•
Individual QR With Headers - The scanner decodes individual QR symbols from a set of linked QR codes
and retains the header information and data.
•
Individual QR No Headers - The scanner decodes individual QR symbols from a set of linked QR codes
and transmits the data without header information.
*Linked QR Only
(0)
Individual QR With Headers
(1)
Individual QR No Headers
(2)
311
Symbologies
Aztec
Parameter # 574
SSI # F1h 3Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Aztec.
NOTE: Enabling this also enables Linked Aztec.
*Enable Aztec
(1)
Disable Aztec
(0)
312
Symbologies
Aztec Inverse
Parameter # 589
SSI # F1h 4Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Aztec inverse decoder setting:
•
Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Aztec barcodes only.
•
Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Aztec barcodes only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec barcodes.
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
*Inverse Autodetect
(2)
313
Symbologies
Han Xin
Parameter # 1167
SSI # F8h 04h 8Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Han Xin.
Enable Han Xin
(1)
*Disable Han Xin
(0)
314
Symbologies
Han Xin Inverse
Parameter # 1168
SSI # F8h 04h 90h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Han Xin inverse decoder setting:
•
Regular Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with normal reflectance only.
•
Inverse Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with inverse reflectance only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Han Xin barcodes.
*Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Inverse Autodetect
(2)
315
Symbologies
Grid Matrix
Parameter # 1718
SSI # F8h 06h B6h
To enable or disable Grid Matrix, scan one of the following barcodes.
Enable Grid Matrix
(1)
*Disable Grid Matrix
(0)
316
Symbologies
Grid Matrix Inverse
Parameter # 1719
SSI # F8h 06h B7h
Select a Grid Matrix inverse decoder setting:
•
Regular Only - the imager decodes Grid Matrix barcodes with normal reflectance only.
•
Inverse Only - the imager decodes Grid Matrix barcodes with inverse reflectance only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - the imager decodes both regular and inverse Grid Matrix barcodes.
*Regular
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Inverse Autodetect
(2)
317
Symbologies
Grid Matrix Mirror
Parameter # 1736
SSI # F8h 06h C8h
Select a mirror image Grid Matrix setting:
•
Regular Only - the imager decodes non-mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes only.
•
Mirrored Only - the imager decodes mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes only.
•
Autodiscriminate - the imager decodes both mirrored and non-mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes.
*Regular Only
(0)
Mirrored Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
318
Symbologies
DotCode
Parameter # 1906
SSI # F8 07 72h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable DotCode.
* Disable DotCode
(0)
Enable DotCode
(1)
319
Symbologies
DotCode Inverse
Parameter # 1907
SSI # F8 07 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Inverse decoder setting. Setting options are:
• Regular Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with normal reflectance only.
• Inverse Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with inverse reflectance only.
• Inverse Autodetect - Decoder decodes both regular and inverse DotCode barcodes.
Regular
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
* Inverse Autodetect
(2)
320
Symbologies
DotCode Mirrored
Parameter # 1908
SSI # F8 07 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Mirror decoder setting:
• Non-Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes non-mirrored DotCode barcodes only.
• Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes mirrored DotCode barcodes only.
• Autodetect - Digital scanner decodes both mirrored and non-mirrored DotCode barcodes.
Non-Mirrored Only
(0)
Mirrored Only
(1)
* Autodetect
(2)
321
Symbologies
DotCode Prioritize
Parameter # 1937
SSI # F8 07 91h
Enable DotCode Prioritize to give priority to DotCode decoding as compared to other symbologies.
Disable
* Enable
Macro PDF Features
Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The scanner can decode
symbols encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data from up to 50 MacroPDF
symbols.
CAUTION: When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers.
Do not mix barcodes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When
scanning a Macro PDF sequence, scan the entire sequence without interruption. When scanning a
mixed sequence, two long low beeps (low / low) indicate an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent
symbology error.
322
Symbologies
Escape Characters
Parameter # 233
SSI # E9h
This enables the backslash (\) character as an Escape character for systems that can process transmissions
containing special data sequences. Scan one of the following barcodes to either format special data according to
the GLI (Global Label Identifier) protocol, or to disable this parameter. This parameter only affects the data portion
of a Macro PDF symbol transmission; the Macro PDF Control Header (if enabled) is always sent with GLI
formatting.
GLI Protocol
(2)
*None
(0)
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Scan the following barcode to flush the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmit it to the
host device, and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Scan the following barcode to clear all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and
abort from Macro PDF mode.
Abort Macro PDF Entry
323
Symbologies
Postal Codes
US Postnet
Parameter # 89
SSI # 59h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Postnet.
Enable US Postnet
(1)
*Disable US Postnet
(0)
US Planet
Parameter # 90
SSI # 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Planet.
Enable US Planet
(1)
*Disable US Planet
(0)
324
Symbologies
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 95
SSI # 5Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet
and US Planet, with or without the check digit.
*Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(0)
UK Postal
Parameter # 91
SSI # 5Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UK Postal.
Enable UK Postal
(1)
*Disable UK Postal
(0)
325
Symbologies
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 96
SSI # 60h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
*Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
(0)
Japan Postal
Parameter # 290
SSI # F0h, 22h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Japan Postal.
Enable Japan Postal
(1)
*Disable Japan Postal
(0)
326
Symbologies
Australia Post
Parameter # 291
SSI # F0h, 23h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Australia Post.
Enable Australia Post
(1)
*Disable Australia Post
(0)
327
Symbologies
Australia Post Format
Parameter # 718
SSI # F1h, CEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a format for Australia Post:
•
Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding
Tables.
NOTE: This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the
Encoding Table used for encoding.
•
Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3.
•
Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table.
•
Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.
For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical
Specifications available at http://www.auspost.com.au.
*Autodiscriminate
(0)
Raw Format
(1)
Alphanumeric Encoding
(2)
Numeric Encoding
(3)
328
Symbologies
Netherlands KIX Code
Parameter # 326
SSI # F0h, 46h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code.
Enable Netherlands KIX Code
(1)
*Disable Netherlands KIX Code
(0)
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
Parameter # 592
SSI # F1h 50h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail.
Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(1)
*Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(0)
329
Symbologies
UPU FICS Postal
Parameter # 611
SSI # F1h 63h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPU FICS Postal.
Enable UPU FICS Postal
(1)
*Disable UPU FICS Postal
(0)
Mailmark
Parameter # 1337
SSI # F8h 05h 39h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Mailmark.
*Disable Mailmark
(0)
Enable Mailmark
(1)
330
OCR Programming
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming. The scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR
typeface. It supports font types OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR-E13B, and US Currency Serial Number.
OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an accurate OCR
template and character subset, and use a check digit.
All OCR fonts are disabled by default. You can enable OCR-A and OCR-B at the same time, but not other
combined font types.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to enable OCR-B, scan the Enable
OCR-B barcode under OCR-B on page 336. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green,
signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
331
OCR Programming
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
OCR Parameter Defaults
Table 32 lists the defaults for OCR parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 32
OCR Programming Default Table
Parameter
Parameter
Number
SSI Number
Default
Page Number
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A
680
F1h A8h
Disable
333
OCR-A Variant
684
F1h ACh
Full ASCII
334
OCR-B
681
F1h A9h
Disable
336
OCR-B Variant
685
F1h ADh
Full ASCII
337
MICR E13B
682
F1h AAh
Disable
341
US Currency
683
F1h ABh
Disable
342
OCR Orientation
687
F1h AFh
0o
342
OCR Lines
691
F1h B3h
1
344
OCR Minimum Characters
689
F1h B1h
3
344
OCR Maximum Characters
690
F1h B2h
100
345
OCR Subset
686
F1h AEh
Selected font
variant
345
OCR Quiet Zone
695
F1h B7h
50
346
OCR Template
547
F1h 23h
99999999
347
OCR Check Digit Modulus
688
F1h B0h
1
356
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
700
F1h BCh
121212121212
357
OCR Check Digit Validation
694
F1h B6h
None
359
Inverse OCR
856
F2h 58h
Regular
364
OCR Redundancy
1770
F8h 06h EAh
Level 1
365
332
OCR Programming
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A
Parameter # 680
SSI # F1h A8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-A.
NOTES 1OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 345 and
OCR Template on page 347.
2. All OCR fonts are disabled by default.
Enable OCR-A
(1)
*Disable OCR-A
(0)
333
OCR Programming
OCR-A Variant
Parameter # 684
SSI # F1 ACh
The font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font. To choose a variant,
scan one of the following barcodes. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and
accuracy.
OCR-A supports the following variants:
•
OCR-A Full ASCII
!"#$()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\^
•
OCR-A Reserved 1
$*+-./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
•
OCR-A Reserved 2
$*+-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
•
OCR-A Banking
-0123456789<>
Special banking characters output as the following representative characters:
outputs as f
outputs as c
outputs as h
NOTE: Enable OCR-A before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-A, set the variant to its default
(OCR-A Full ASCII).
334
OCR Programming
OCR-A Variant (continued)
*OCR-A Full ASCII
(0)
OCR-A Reserved 1
(1)
OCR-A Reserved 2
(2)
OCR-A Banking
(3)
335
OCR Programming
OCR-B
Parameter # 681
SSI # F1h A9h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-B.
NOTES 1OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 345 and
OCR Template on page 347.
2. All OCR fonts are disabled by default.
Enable OCR-B
(1)
*Disable OCR-B
(0)
336
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant
Parameter # 685
SSI # F1h ADh
OCR-B has the following variants. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and accuracy.
•
OCR-B Full ASCII
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
•
OCR-B Banking
#+-0123456789<>JNP|
•
OCR-B Limited
+,-./0123456789<>ACENPSTVX
•
OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
•
OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
•
OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
•
OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
•
OCR-B Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
•
OCR-B Passport
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
•
OCR-B Visa Type A
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
•
OCR-B Visa Type B
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
•
OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents
This allows reading either TD1, TD2, Passport, Visa Type A, or Visa Type B without switching between these
options. It automatically recognizes the travel document read.
Selecting one of the ISBN Book Numbers automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum, so setting this is
not required.
337
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant (continued)
To choose a variant, scan one of the following barcodes. Selecting the following OCR-B variants automatically sets
the appropriate OCR Lines on page 344. These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and checking for
that particular document type:
Variant
OCR Lines Setting
Passport
2
TD1 ID Cards
3
TD2 ID Cards
2
Visa Type A
2
Visa Type B
2
If you set one of these variants with both OCR-A and OCR-B enabled, only the specified travel document is read
without reading OCR-A. Returning OCR-B variant to its default (Full ASCII) allows reading OCR-A.
For the best performance in passport reading, fix the target passport and the scanner in place (6.5 - 7.5”).
NOTE: Enable OCR-B before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-B, set the variant to its default
(OCR-B Full ASCII).
*OCR-B Full ASCII
(0)
OCR-B Banking
(1)
OCR-B Limited
(2)
OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
(6)
338
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
(7)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1)
3 Line ID Cards
(3)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2)
2-Line ID Cards
(8)
Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect
(20)
OCR-B Passport
(4)
OCR-B Visa Type A
(9)
339
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR-B Visa Type B
(10)
OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents
(11)
340
OCR Programming
MICR E13B
Parameter # 682
SSI # F1h AAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MICR E13B.
MICR E 13B uses the following characters:
TOAD characters (Transit, On Us, Amount, and Dash) output as the following representative characters:
outputs as t
outputs as a
outputs as o
outputs as d
NOTES 1OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 345 and
OCR Template on page 347.
2. All OCR fonts are disabled by default.
Enable MICR E13B
(1)
*Disable MICR E13B
(0)
341
OCR Programming
US Currency Serial Number
Parameter # 683
SSI # F1h ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Currency Serial Number.
NOTES 1OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 345 and
OCR Template on page 347.
2. All OCR fonts are disabled by default.
Enable US Currency
(1)
*Disable US Currency
(0)
OCR Orientation
Parameter # 687
SSI # F1h AFh
Select one of five options to specify the orientation of the OCR to read:
•
0o to the imaging engine (default)
•
270o clockwise (or 90o counterclockwise) to the imaging engine
•
180o (upside down) to the imaging engine
•
90o clockwise to the imaging engine
•
Omnidirectional
Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes.
342
OCR Programming
OCR Orientation (continued)
*OCR Orientation 0o
(0)
OCR Orientation 270o Clockwise
(1)
OCR Orientation 180o Clockwise
(2)
OCR Orientation 90o Clockwise
(3)
OCR Orientation Omnidirectional
(4)
343
OCR Programming
OCR Lines
Parameter # 691
SSI # F1h B3h
To select the number of OCR lines to decode, scan one of the following barcodes. Selecting Visas, TD1, or TD2 ID
cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines. Also see OCR-B Variant on page 337.
*OCR 1 Line
(1)
OCR 2 Lines
(2)
OCR 3 Lines
(3)
OCR Minimum Characters
Parameter # 689
SSI # F1h B1h
To select the minimum number of OCR characters (not including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes
representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are
ignored. The default is 003.
OCR Minimum Characters
344
OCR Programming
OCR Maximum Characters
Parameter # 690
SSI # F1h B2h
To select the maximum number of OCR characters (including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes
representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are
ignored. The default is 100.
OCR Maximum Characters
OCR Subset
Parameter # 686
SSI # F1h AEh
Create an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant. For example, if
scanning only numbers and the letters A, B, and C, create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding.
This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts.
To set or modify the OCR font subset:
1.
Enable the appropriate OCR font(s).
2.
Scan the OCR Subset barcode.
3.
Scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from Alphanumeric Barcodes.
4.
Scan End of Message on page 460.
OCR Subset
To cancel an OCR subset, for OCR-A or OCR-B, scan OCR-A variant Full ASCII, or OCR-B variant Full ASCII.
For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number, create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that
character set, or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 142 and re-program the scanner.
345
OCR Programming
OCR Quiet Zone
Parameter # 695
SSI # F1h B7h
This option sets the OCR quiet zone. The scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank
space. The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option. Used with parsers that tolerate slanted
characters, the End of Field count is approximately a count of 8 for a character width. For example, if set to 15,
then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser. Larger end of field numbers require bigger
quiet zones at each end of text line.
To set a quiet zone, scan the following barcode, then scan a two-digit number using the numeric keypad in
Alphanumeric Barcodes. The range of the quiet zone is 20 - 99 and the default is 50, indicating a six character
width quiet zone.
OCR Quiet Zone
346
OCR Programming
OCR Template
Parameter # 547
SSI # F1h 23h
This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format. Carefully
constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors.
To set or modify the OCR decode template, scan the OCR Template barcode, and then scan barcodes on the
following pages that correspond to numbers and letters to form the template expression. Then scan End of
Message. The default is 99999999 which accepts OCR strings containing any character.
OCR Template
End of Message
Required Digit (9)
Only a numeric character is allowed in this position.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
99999
12987
30517
123AB
9
Required Alpha (A)
Only an alpha character is allowed in this position.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
AAAAA
ABCDE
UVWXY
12FGH
347
OCR Programming
A
Require and Suppress (0)
Any character in this position, including space or reject, is suppressed from the output.
Template
Incoming data Output
990AA
12QAB
12AB
0
Optional Alphanumeric (1)
An alphanumeric character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first
character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
99991
1234A
12345
1234<
1
Optional Alpha (2)
An alpha character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first
character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
AAAA2
ABCDE
WXYZ
ABCD6
348
OCR Programming
2
Alpha or Digit (3)
An alphanumeric character is required in this position to validate the incoming data.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
33333
12ABC
WXY34
12AB<
3
Any Including Space & Reject (4)
Any character is accepted in this position, including space and reject. An underscore (_) represents rejects in the
output. This is a good selection for troubleshooting.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
99499
12$34
34 98
4
Any except Space & Reject (5)
Any character is accepted in this position, except a space or reject.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
55999
A.123
*Z456
A BCD
349
OCR Programming
5
Optional Digit (7)
A numeric character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of
like characters.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
99977
12345
789
789AB
7
Digit or Fill (8)
Any numeric or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Valid data
88899
12345
>>789
<<789
8
Alpha or Fill (F)
Any alpha or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Valid data
AAAFF
ABCXY
LMN>>
ABC<5
350
OCR Programming
F
Optional Space ( )
A space is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like
characters.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
99 99
12 34
1234
67891
Space
Optional Small Special (.)
A special character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of
like characters. Small special characters are - , and .
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
AA.99
MN.35
XY98
XYZ12
.
Other Template Operators
These template operators assist in capturing, delimiting, and formatting scanned OCR data.
Literal String (" and +)
Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the alphanumeric keyboard in Alphanumeric
Barcodes to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data. There are two
351
OCR Programming
characters used to delimit required literal strings; if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal
string, use the other delimiter.
Template
Valid data
Invalid data
"35+BC"
35+BC
AB+22
“
+
New Line (E)
To create a template of multiple lines, add E between the template of each single line.
Template
Valid data
Valid data
Invalid data
999EAAAA
321
987
XYZW
BCAD
ZXYW
12
E
String Extract (C)
This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data. The string
extract is structured as follows:
CbPe
Where:
•
C is the string extract operator
•
b is the string begin delimiter
•
P is the category (one or more numeric or alpha characters) describing the string representation
•
e is the string end delimiter
352
OCR Programming
Values for b and e can be any scannable character. They are included in the output stream.
Template
Incoming data
Output
C>A>
XQ3>ABCDE>
>ABCDE>
->ATHRUZ>123
>ATHRUZ>
1ABCZXYZ
No Output
C
Ignore to End of Field (D)
This operator causes all characters after a template to be ignored. Use this as the last character in a template
expression. Examples for the template 999D:
Template
Incoming data Output
999D
123-PED
123
357298
357
193
193
D
Skip Until (P1)
This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected. It can be used in
two ways:
P1ct
Where:
•
P1 is the Skip Until operator
•
c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
•
t is one or more template characters
P1"s"t
Where:
•
P1 is the Skip Until operator
353
OCR Programming
•
"s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 351) that trigger the start of
output
•
t is one or more template characters
The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator, and the first character in the
template should accommodate this trigger.
Template
Incoming data
Output
P1"PN"AA9999
123PN9876
PN9876
PN1234
PN1234
X-PN3592
PN3592
P
1
Skip Until Not (P0)
This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in the output
stream. It can be used in two ways:
P0ct
Where:
•
P0 is the Skip Until Not operator
•
c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
•
t is one or more template characters
P0"s"t
Where:
•
P0 is the Skip Until Not operator
•
"s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 351) that trigger the start
of output
•
t is one or more template characters
354
OCR Programming
The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator.
Template
Incoming data
Output
P0A9999
BPN3456
3456
PN1234
1234
5341
No output
Template
Incoming data
Output
P0"PN"9999
PN3456
3456
5341
No output
PNPN7654
7654
P
0
Repeat Previous (R)
This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times, allowing the capture of variable-length
scanned data. The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required
digits:
Template
Incoming data
Output
AA9R
AB3
AB3
PN12345
PN12345
32RM52700
No output
R
355
OCR Programming
Scroll Until Match (S)
This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template.
Template
Incoming data
Output
S99999
AB3
No Output
PN12345
12345
32RM52700
52700
S
Multiple Templates
This feature sets up multiple templates for OCR decoding. To do this, follow the procedure described in OCR
Template on page 347 (scan the OCR Template barcode, and then barcodes corresponding to numbers and letters
to form the template expression, and then End of Message) for each template in the multiple template string, using
a capital letter X as a separator between templates.
For example, set the OCR Template as 99999XAAAAA to decode OCR strings of either 12345 or ABCDE.
Template Examples
Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition.
Field Definition
"M"99977
Description
M followed by three digits and two optional digits.
"X"997777"X"
X followed by two digits, four optional digits, and an X.
9959775599
Two digits followed by any character, a digit, two optional digits, any two
characters, and two digits.
A55"-"999"-"99
A letter followed by two characters, a dash, three digits, a dash, and two digits.
33A"."99
Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter, a period, and two digits.
999992991
Five digits followed by an optional alpha, two digits, and an optional alphanumeric.
"PN98"
Literal field - PN98
OCR Check Digit Modulus
Parameter # 688
SSI # F1h B0h
The check digit is the last digit (in the right-most position) in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the
collected data. This option sets OCR module check digit calculation. The calculation is performed on incoming data
356
OCR Programming
to determine this check digit, based on the numeric weight of the alpha and numeric characters. See OCR Check
Digit Multiplier on page 357. If the incoming data does not match the check digit, the data is considered corrupt.
The selected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation on page 359.
To choose the Check Digit Modulus, such as 10 for Modulus 10, scan the following barcode, and then scan a
three-digit number from 001 to 099 representing the check digit using the numeric keypad in Alphanumeric
Barcodes. The default is 1.
OCR Check Digit
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
Parameter # 700
SSI # F1h BCh
This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for character positions. For check digit validation, each character in
scanned data has an assigned weight to use in calculating the check digit. The scanner OCR ships with the
following weight equivalents:
0=0
A = 10
K = 20
U = 30
1=1
B = 11
L = 21
V = 31
2=2
C = 12
M = 22
W = 32
3=3
D = 13
N = 23
X = 33
4=4
E = 14
O = 24
Y = 34
5=5
F = 15
P = 25
Z = 35
6=6
G = 16
Q = 26
Space = 0
7=7
H = 17
R = 27
8=8
I = 18
S = 28
9=9
J = 19
T = 29
All other characters are equivalent to one (1).
You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default.
121212121212 (default)
123456789A (for ISBN, Product Add Right to Left. See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 359)
For example:
ISBN
0
2
0
1
1
8
3
9
9
4
Multiplier
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Product
0
18
0
7
6
40
12
27
18
4
Product add
0+
18+
0+
7+
6+
40+
12+
27+
18+
4=
357
132
OCR Programming
ISBN uses Modulus 11 for the check digit. In this case, 132 is divisible by 11, so it passes the check digit.
To set the check digit multiplier, scan the following barcode, and then scan numbers and letters to form the
multiplier string from Alphanumeric Barcodes. Then scan End of Message on page 460.
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
358
OCR Programming
OCR Check Digit Validation
Parameter # 694
SSI # F1h B6h
Use the following options to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme.
None
No check digit validation, indicating no check digit is applied. This is the default.
*No Check Digit
(0)
Product Add Left to Right
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 357).
Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, and
the sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1
3
2
4
5
6
Multiplier
1
2
3
4
5
6
Product
1
6
6
16
25
36
Product add
1+
6+
6+
16+
25+
36=
90
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is zero).
Product Add Left to Right
(3)
359
OCR Programming
Product Add Right to Left
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 357).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is
multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit
Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132459 (check digit is 9)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1
3
2
4
5
9
Multiplier
6
5
4
3
2
1
Product
6
15
8
12
10
9
Product add
6+
15+
8+
12+
10+
9=
60
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).
Product Add Right to Left
(1)
Digit Add Left to Right
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 357).
Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier,
resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products
is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1
3
2
4
5
6
Multiplier
1
2
3
4
5
6
Product
1
6
6
16
25
36
Digit add
1+
6+
6+
1+6+
2+5+
3+6=
360
36
OCR Programming
The Check Digit Modulus is 12. It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 (the remainder is 0).
Digit Add Left to Right
(4)
Digit Add Right to Left
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 357).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is
multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if
this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1
3
2
4
5
6
Multiplier
6
5
4
3
2
1
Product
6
15
8
12
10
6
Digit add
6+
1+5+
8+
1+2+
1+0+
6=
30
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).
Digit Add Right to Left
(2)
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 357).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is
multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of these products except for the check digit's product is computed. The check digit passes
if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
361
OCR Programming
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1
2
2
4
5
6
Multiplier
6
5
4
3
2
1
Product
6
10
8
12
10
6
Product add
6+
10+
8+
12+
10=
46
6
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6.
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
(5)
Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 357).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is
multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit's product is then
calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122459 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1
2
2
4
5
9
Multiplier
6
5
4
3
2
1
Product
6
10
8
12
10
9
Digit add
6+
1+0+
8+
1+2+
1+0=
19
9
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9.
Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
(6)
362
OCR Programming
Health Industry - HIBCC43
This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard. The check digit is the modulus 43 sum of all the
character values in a given message, and is printed as the last character in a given message.
Example:
Supplier Labelling Data Structure: + A 1 2 3 B J C 5 D 6 E 7 1
Sum of values: 41+10+1+2+3+11+19+12+5+13+6+14+7+1 = 145
Divide 145 by 43. The quotient is 3 with a remainder of 16. The check digit is the character corresponding to the
value of the remainder (see Table 33), which in this example is 16, or G. The complete Supplier Labeling Data
Structure, including the check digit, therefore is:
A123BJC5D6E71G
Table 33
Table of Numeric Value Assignments for Computing HIBC LIC Data Format Check Digit
0=0
9=9
I = 18
R = 27
- = 36
1=1
A = 10
J = 19
S = 28
. = 37
2=2
B = 11
K = 20
T = 29
Space = 38
3=3
C = 12
L = 21
U =30
$ = 39
4=4
D = 13
M = 22
V = 31
/ = 40
5=5
E = 14
N = 23
W = 32
+ = 41
6=6
F = 15
O = 24
X = 33
% = 42
7=7
G = 16
P = 25
Y = 34
8=8
H = 17
Q = 26
Z = 35
Health Industry - HIBCC43
(9)
363
OCR Programming
Inverse OCR
Parameter # 856
SSI # F2h 58h
Inverse OCR is white or light words on a black or dark background. Select an option for decoding inverse OCR:
•
Regular Only - Decode regular OCR (black on white) strings only.
•
Inverse Only - Decode inverse OCR (white on black) strings only.
•
Autodiscriminate - Decode both regular and inverse OCR strings.
*Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
364
OCR Programming
OCR Redundancy
Parameter # 1770
SSI # F8h 06h EAh
This option adjusts the number of times to decode an OCR text string before transmission. There are three levels
of OCR decode redundancy. There is an inverse relationship between the redundancy level and OCR decoding
aggressiveness. Increasing the level of the redundancy can reduce OCR scanning aggressiveness, so select only
the level of redundancy necessary.
•
OCR Redundancy Level 1: This default setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state
while providing sufficient accuracy in decoding most in-spec OCR text strings.
•
OCR Redundancy Level 2: This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable
aggressiveness.
•
OCR Redundancy Level 3: Select this option with greater redundancy requirements if OCR Redundancy
Level 2 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
*OCR Redundancy Level 1
(1)
OCR Redundancy Level 2
(2)
OCR Redundancy Level 3
(3)
365
Intelligent Document
Capture (IDC)
Introduction
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) is Zebra advanced image processing firmware for select imager based
scanners. This chapter describes the IDC functionality, provides parameter barcodes to control IDC features, and
includes a quick start procedure.
The IDC Process
Intelligent Document Capture:
1.
Verifies a barcode is appropriate to use as an IDC anchor or link. See Barcode Acceptance Test.
2.
Determines the rectangular region to capture as an image. See Capture Region Determination on page 367.
3.
Processes the captured image. See Image Post Processing on page 368.
4.
Transmits the data. See Data Transmission on page 368.
366
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
Barcode Acceptance Test
Upon decoding a barcode, the scanner checks that the barcode fits the description of a barcode that anchors or
links to an IDC form. To be accepted as an IDC barcode:
•
The symbology must be enabled for decode, and also enabled via IDC Symbology on page 372. The IDC
firmware allows enabling between zero and eight symbologies simultaneously:
Code 128, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, PDF417, Data Matrix, and EAN-128.
•
The decoded data must satisfy the values set in the IDC Minimum Text Length and IDC Maximum Text
Length parameters. To disable either of these checks, set the value to zero.
If the barcode does not satisfy both requirements, it is sent as a normal (non-IDC) decode.
An IDC barcode is required when IDC Operating Mode on page 371 is set to Anchored or Linked.
Free-Form operating mode does not require a barcode, but transmits decoded data if one is found and satisfies
the requirements. If no barcode is decoded, the document capture process starts but may require specifying a
non-zero value for the IDC Delay Time on page 382. The scanner must wait for at least this amount of time after
trigger pull before capturing a document, unless a barcode is decoded before the time expires.
If Picklist Mode on page 162 is enabled, the barcode must be directly under the aiming pattern and within the
scanner’s decode range, and the region to capture must be completely within the scanner's field-of-view.
Capture Region Determination
After accepting an IDC barcode, the firmware establishes the region to capture as an image. The method used
depends on the setting of the IDC Operating Mode as follows.
The IDC firmware emits a single low beep after successfully capturing a region. The scanner is then no longer
capturing images and can be moved without disturbing the IDC output. Be sure to hold the trigger button until the
decode beep, otherwise the IDC process may be aborted.
IDC Operating Mode = Anchored
A coordinate system is built based on the barcode in its rectified (de-skewed) form. The origin is the center of the
barcode, and the x-axis is set toward the right, from the barcode's point of view. The unit module width of the
barcode is the unit for x. Similarly, the y-axis is set toward the up direction. The unit for the y-axis is specified via
the parameter IDC Aspect on page 375. This is the aspect ratio of a thin bar or space - the barcode's height is
divided by this value to get this unit. Set IDC Aspect to zero to automatically calculate the aspect ratio. The barcode
can be of different sizes for the same form, as long as the center of the barcode is the same when the barcode's
length changes.
From this coordinate system, the IDC area is determined using four parameters: offsets in x and y (IDC X
Coordinate, IDC Y Coordinate) to the region's top-left corner, and width and height (IDC Width, IDC Height).
If the capture area is relatively large as compared to the barcode area, the calculation to obtain the capture area is
prone to significant errors. A recommended solution is to enclose the form with a single black-lined rectangular
border (a box), which is not in contact with any other line on the outside of the form (although it can be connected
to lines on the inside of the form). When the IDC Find Box Outline is set, the firmware searches for the box, and
does not decode if any edges are broken (such as by a protruding thumb).
The IDC Zoom Limit parameter controls the quality of the captured form. The IDC firmware rejects capturing a form
unless the width is at least the IDC Zoom Limit percentage of the IDC Width parameter. For example, if IDC Zoom
Limit is set to 100 and IDC Width is set to 150, the form must be at least 300 pixels wide before it is captured (each
unit module is scaled to two pixels).
The IDC Maximum Rotation parameter controls the maximum rotation any edge of the form can have in relation to
the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis.
367
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Operating Mode = Free-Form or Linked
The document capture region is a rectangular piece of paper, or a portion of it enclosed by a rectangular border. In
either case, all four sides of the capture region must be completely within the scanner's field-of-view, and there
must be sufficient contrast at the border of the capture region. For example, if a piece of white paper contains the
document to capture, it must be put in front of a dark background.
By default, the scanner captures the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view. To specify a particular
border type, use the IDC Border Type parameter.
The region must contain at least 10% of the field-of-view in two dimensions.
If an IDC barcode is decoded, IDC uses its location to start the search for the capture region. Otherwise, it
searches the capture region from the center of the field-of-view. IDC also uses the orientation of a decoded IDC
barcode to orient the output image.
Image Post Processing
After determining the document capture region, the firmware de-skews and re-samples the region as follows.
Enabling IDC Captured Image Brighten calls normalization, which makes the brightness of the image uniform, and
enhances contrast as a large percent of background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is
made completely black if the firmware determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland
area). Enabling IDC Captured Image Sharpen enhances the sharpness of the image.
IDC re-samples the image about one output pixel per input pixel for Free-Form or Linked modes and two
pixels-per-module in Anchored mode.
IDC compresses and transmits the image in one of the standard image formats selected by the IDC File Format
Selector, IDC Bits Per Pixel, and IDC JPEG Quality parameters.
Note that it may take several seconds for post processing to complete, depending on the size of the captured
region, the options enabled, and the scanner model.
Data Transmission
After processing the captured image, IDC assembles the image with the decoded barcode data (if applicable) into
an ISO/IEC 15434 style packet and transmits it to the host. The scanner issues the standard decode beep and the
trigger can be released. Be sure to set the USB Device Type on page 62 to Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with
Imaging Interface.
PC Application and Programming Support
For a sample application running on the Microsoft Windows operating system, contact your Zebra representative.
This application displays barcode data and/or captured images from Intelligent Document Capture enabled
scanners and allows setting and reading IDC parameters. Complete source code and documentation are also
provided for developing custom applications. The application includes documentation for the ISO/IEC 15434
format as used by the IDC firmware and C# code to process it.
Setting Parameters
This section describes the parameters controlling the IDC firmware and provides programming barcodes for setting
them.
368
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 34 on page 370 (also see Standard Parameter Defaults for all
defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the document capture file
format to BMP, scan the BMP barcode under IDC File Format Selector on page 375. The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
369
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
Image Document Capture Parameter Defaults
Table 34 lists defaults for IDC parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
•
Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 142.
•
Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Standard Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Alternatively, use the sample application to set parameters using the parameter name. The application provides
prompts and error checking to assist in setting the parameters correctly and easily. You must use an application to
set a parameter to a negative value, as the IDC X Coordinate can require.
Table 34
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter Name
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page
Number
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode
DocCap_MODE
594
F1h 52h
Off
371
IDC Symbology
DocCap_SYMBOLOGY
655
F1h 8Fh
001
372
IDC X Coordinate
DocCap_X
596
F4h F1h 54h
-151
373
IDC Y Coordinate
DocCap_Y
597
F4h F1h 55h
-050
373
IDC Width
DocCap_WIDTH
598
F1h 56h
0300
374
IDC Height
DocCap_HEIGHT
599
F1h 57h
0050
374
IDC Aspect
DocCap_ASPECT
595
F1h 53h
000
375
IDC File Format Selector
DocCap_FMT
601
F1h 59h
JPEG
375
IDC Bits Per Pixel
DocCap_BPP
602
F1h 5Ah
8 BPP
376
IDC JPEG Quality
DocCap_JPEG_Qual
603
F1h 5Bh
065
377
IDC Find Box Outline
Sig_FINDBOX
727
F1h D7h
Disable
377
IDC Minimum Text Length
DocCap_MIN_TEXT
656
F1h 90h
00
378
IDC Maximum Text Length
DocCap_MAX_TEXT
657
F1h 91h
00
378
IDC Captured Image Brighten
Sig_BRIGHTEN
654
F1h 8Eh
Enable
379
IDC Captured Image Sharpen
Sig_SHARPEN
658
F1h 92h
Enable
380
IDC Border Type
DocCap_BORDER
829
F2h 3Dh
None
381
IDC Delay Time
DocCap_DELAY
830
F2h 3Eh
000
382
IDC Zoom Limit
Sig_MIN_PERCENT
651
F1h 8Bh
000
382
IDC Maximum Rotation
Sig_MAX_ROT
652
F1h 8Ch
00
383
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
370
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Operating Mode
Parameter Name: DocCap_MODE
Parameter # 594
SSI # F1h 52h
Select the operating mode of the Intelligent Document Capture firmware:
•
Off - Disables the IDC feature.
•
Anchored - Requires a barcode decode. The image capture region is based off this barcode.
•
Free-Form - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is optional.
•
Linked - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is required.
*Off
(0)
Anchored
(1)
Free-Form
(2)
Linked
(3)
371
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Symbology
Parameter Name: DocCap_SYMBOLOGY
Parameter # 655
SSI # F1h 8Fh
Select the barcode type(s) to use when Document Capture mode is not set to Off. To enable more than one
symbology at a time, simply add the values together. For example, to enable PDF417, Data Matrix, and Code 39
write a value of 98 (32 + 64 + 2).
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 255
decimal. The default is 001.
Table 35
IDC Symbologies
Symbology
Value (Decimal)
Code 128
1
Code 39
2
I 2 of 5
4
D 2 of 5
8
Codabar
16
PD 417
32
Data Matrix
64
EAN 128
128
Aztec
256
IDC Symbology
372
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC X Coordinate
Parameter Name: DocCap_X
Parameter # 596
SSI # F4h F1h 54h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the horizontal offset to the top
left corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the left.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of
+/- 1279. The default is -151. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC X Coordinate
IDC Y Coordinate
Parameter Name: DocCap_Y
Parameter # 597
SSI # F4h F1h 55h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the vertical offset to the top left
corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the top.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of
+/- 1023. The default is -050. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC Y Coordinate
373
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Width
Parameter Name: DocCap_WIDTH
Parameter # 598
SSI # F1h 56h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the width of the region to
capture.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279.
The default is 0300.
IDC Width
IDC Height
Parameter Name: DocCap_HEIGHT
Parameter # 599
SSI # F1h 57h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the height of the region to
capture.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279.
The default is 0050.
IDC Height
374
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Aspect
Parameter Name: DocCap_ASPECT
Parameter # 595
SSI # F1h 53h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the barcode's aspect ratio of a
thin bar or space. The barcode's height is divided by this value to obtain the unit in the y-axis. Set this parameter to
zero to calculate the aspect value automatically.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 255. The
default is 000.
IDC Aspect
IDC File Format Selector
Parameter Name: DocCap_FMT
Parameter # 601
SSI # F1h 59h
Select a document capture file format appropriate for your system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The scanner stores
captured areas in the selected format.
*JPEG
(1)
BMP
(3)
TIFF
(4)
375
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Bits Per Pixel
Parameter Name: DocCap_BPP
Parameter # 602
SSI # F1h 5Ah
Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image. Select 1 BPP for a black and
white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each
pixel.
NOTE: The scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
*8 BPP
(2)
376
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC JPEG Quality
Parameter Name: DocCap_JPEG_Qual
Parameter # 603
SSI # F1h 5Bh
Set the amount of JPEG compression to perform on the captured image. Higher numbers produce a better quality
image but larger files.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 005 to 100
decimal. The default is 065.
IDC JPEG Quality
IDC Find Box Outline
Parameter Name: Sig_FINDBOX
Parameter # 727
SSI # F1h D7h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Scan Enable Find Box Outline to
search for a rectangular border during document capture.
Enable Find Box Outline
(1)
*Disable Find Box Outline
(0)
377
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Minimum Text Length
Parameter Name: DocCap_MIN_TEXT
Parameter # 656
SSI # F1h 90h
Specify the minimum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or
linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 00 to 55 decimal.
The default is 00.
IDC Minimum Text Length
IDC Maximum Text Length
Parameter Name: DocCap_MAX_TEXT
Parameter # 657
SSI # F1h 91h
Specify the maximum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or
linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 00 to 55 decimal.
The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Text Length
378
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Captured Image Brighten
Parameter Name: Sig_BRIGHTEN
Parameter # 654
SSI # F1h 8Eh
Enable Captured Image Brighten to make image brightness uniform and enhance contrast such that a large
percent of the background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is made completely black if
the program determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland area).
NOTE: This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
*Enable Captured Image Brighten
(1)
Disable Captured Image Brighten
(0)
379
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Captured Image Sharpen
Parameter Name: Sig_SHARPEN
Parameter # 658
SSI # F1h 92h
Enable this to enhance the sharpness of the image.
NOTE: This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
*Enable Captured Image Sharpen
(1)
Disable Captured Image Sharpen
(0)
380
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Border Type
Parameter Name: DocCap_BORDER
Parameter # 829
SSI # F2h 3Dh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Free-Form or Linked. Select the style of border
used to determine the outline of the capture region:
•
None - Capture the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view.
•
Black - The border must be black (such as a printed rectangular border).
•
White - The border must be white (e.g., paper edge on a dark background).
•
Advanced Edge Detection (AED) - Capture a region defined by edges of any color and potentially
broken.
*None
(0)
Black
(1)
White
(2)
Advanced Edge Detection (AED)
(3)
381
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Delay Time
Parameter Name: DocCap_DELAY
Parameter # 830
SSI # F2h 3Eh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Free-Form. Set the delay for capturing a
document after a trigger pull. Decoding a barcode aborts this delay.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 200
decimal in units of 10 msec. The default is 000.
IDC Delay Time
IDC Zoom Limit
Parameter Name: Sig_MIN_PERCENT
Parameter # 651
SSI # F1h 8Bh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Set the minimal "zoom" percentage
value of a form for it to be considered for capture. This controls the quality of the captured form. The IDC firmware
rejects capturing a form unless the width is at least the IDC Zoom Limit percentage of the IDC Width parameter.
For example, if you set this parameter to 100 and IDC Width to 150, the form must be at least 300 pixels wide
before it is captured (each unit module is scaled to two pixels).
Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 100
percent. The default is 000.
IDC Zoom Limit
382
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Maximum Rotation
Parameter Name: Sig_MAX_ROT
Parameter # 652
SSI # F1h 8Ch
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Set the maximum rotation any edge of
the form can have in relation to the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis for it to be considered for capture. Set this
to zero (the default) to disable all checking.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 00 to 45 decimal.
The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Rotation
383
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
Quick Start
This section familiarizes you with some of the Intelligent Document Capture features. IDC Demonstrations on page
385 includes instructions to demonstrate the Anchored, Free-Form, and Linked modes using a sample form to
provide an understanding of how to use IDC. These examples do not illustrate all capabilities of the advanced IDC
firmware. Build upon these using different parameter settings and forms.
Sample IDC Setup
To set up IDC:
1.
Connect a scanner equipped with IDC to the host computer's USB port.
2.
To set the scanner to the default settings and proper USB host type, scan Set Defaults followed by the
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface barcode. Allow time for the scanner to reset and the
USB connection to remunerate after each scan before continuing.
Set Defaults
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
3.
Start the sample application and select the scanner in the SNAPI Scanners drop-down menu.
4.
Set parameters as specified in IDC Demonstrations on page 385 using the sample application or by scanning
parameter barcodes in this guide. The barcode in the sample form is Code 128, which is enabled by default for
decoding and as a Document Capture symbology. You can change these settings for your IDC application.
5.
Perform each demo. When scanning, aim the scanner at the barcode in the center of the rectangle. Pull the
scanner back so the rectangle is fully contained in the aiming pattern. When you pull the trigger, the scanner
emits a low tone to indicate that the IDC firmware identified and captured an image, then a decode beep to
indicate that the data transmitted. There may be several seconds between the two beeps, depending on the
size of the captured image and options selected (de-skew, brighten, etc). You can move the scanner after the
first beep, but continue the hold the trigger or the scanner may end the session before sending the data.
384
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
IDC Demonstrations
Anchored Mode Demo
•
Set IDC Operating Mode on page 371 to Anchored.
•
Set parameters to these values:
•
Set IDC Height on page 374 to 100.
•
Set IDC Width on page 374 to 90.
•
Set IDC X Coordinate on page 373 to -175.
•
Set IDC Y Coordinate on page 373 to -50.
•
Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the text scroll.
•
Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner
decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with
the form rotated counter-clockwise or upside down).
•
Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. The captured area changes in size and
location.
•
Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper (or your finger) and pull the trigger. The scanner does not
decode the barcode or capture an image.
What This Demonstrates
Anchored mode captures an image of fixed size and location relative to a barcode on the page. Parameters control
the height, width, and location. The IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It
decodes the barcode and uses it to adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Free-Form Mode Demo
•
Set IDC Operating Mode on page 371 to Free-Form.
•
Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the entire rectangle, including
the contents.
•
Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. Note that the captured image is not affected.
•
Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner
decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with
the form rotated counterclockwise or upside down).
•
Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper and pull the trigger. The scanner does not decode the
barcode and does not re-orient the captured image to the normal position, i.e., with the logo in the
upper-left corner.
What This Demonstrates
Free-Form mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. It
adjusts the image to the upright orientation if a barcode is found and decoded in the image.
Linked Mode Demo
Set IDC Operating Mode on page 371 to Linked.
Use the examples from the Free-Form Mode Demo, noting that the last item (covering the barcode) does not
decode the barcode or capture an image.
385
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC)
What This Demonstrates
Linked mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. The
IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It decodes the barcode and uses it to
adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Other Suggestions
Hold the scanner at an angle (up/down or side to side) to the page instead of perpendicular to it. The IDC firmware
de-skews and adjusts the brightness (enabled by default) to produce a quality image when the scanner is held at
less than ideal conditions.
Quick Start Form
Figure 18
Quick Start Form
386
Data Formatting: ADF,
MDF, Preferred Symbol
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra features available for customizing scanner operation.
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF)
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) allows customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF to edit
scanned data to suit the host application's requirements. With ADF you scan one barcode per trigger pull. ADF is
programmed using 123Scan.
For a video on Creating an Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rule using 123Scan, go to:
www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
For additional information, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Multicode Data Formatting (Hand-held Mode Only)
Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) enables a 2D scanner to scan all barcodes on a label with a single trigger pull,
and then modify and transmit the data to meet host application requirements. MDF supports programming up to
nine unique labels into one scanner. MDF also supports scanning multiple barcodes on opposite sides of a box by
holding the trigger.
MDF options include:
•
Output all or specific barcodes.
•
Control the barcode output sequence.
•
Apply unique multicode data formatting (MDF) to each output barcode.
•
Discard scanned data if all required barcodes are not present.
387
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
Programming a Scanner
•
Using 123Scan, programming an MDF is similar to programming an ADF rule. MDF programming is saved
in a 123Scan configuration file.
•
MDF can be deployed to a fleet of 2D scanners using the Scanner Management Service (SMS) through a
traditional SMS package.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide,
p/n MN-002895-xx.
For a video on Creating an Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) Rule using 123Scan, go to:
www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
Preferred Symbol
Preferred Symbol is a barcode prioritization technique that enables favored decoding of high priority barcode(s).
The Preferred Symbol is the only barcode that is decoded and output within the preset Preferred Symbol Timeout.
During this time, the scanner attempts to decode the prioritized barcode and reports only this barcode.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide,
p/n MN-002895-xx.
To program Preferred Symbol via 123Scan, select 123Scan > Configuration Wizard > Symbologies screen, and
then select Preferred Symbol from the drop-down menu. Preferred Symbol programming is saved in the 123Scan
configuration file.
388
Driver’s License Set Up
(DSXXXX-DL)
Introduction
The scanner uses internally embedded algorithms to parse out barcode information from standard US driver's
licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards.
Scanning these barcodes produces formatted data for use in age verification, credit card application information,
and more.
Set Factory Defaults on page 142. Throughout the programming barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default
values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
Feature/option
(1)
Option value
This chapter describes how to program the scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D barcodes on US
driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
Table 36
DL Parsing Parameter Table
Parameter
Default
Page
Number
DL Parsing Parameters
Driver’s License Parsing
No Driver’s License Parsing
390
Parsing Driver’s License
Data Fields
N/A
391
Driver’s License Parse
Field Barcodes
N/A
392
AAMVA Parse Field
Barcodes
N/A
395
Set Default Parameter
N/A
405
Output Gender as M or F
N/A
405
389
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Table 36
DL Parsing Parameter Table (Continued)
Parameter
Default
Page
Number
Date Format
CCYYMMDD
406
No Separator
N/A
408
Send Keystroke
N/A
409
Control Characters
409
Keyboard Characters
414
Parsing Rule Example
N/A
430
Embedded Driver’s
License Parsing ADF
Example
N/A
434
Driver’s License Parsing
To enable driver's license parsing on the scanner, scan the Embedded Driver's License Parsing barcode. This does
not require Zebra software (.DLL).
Scan the barcodes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the scanner
outputs. See Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) on page 391 for more
information.
*No Driver’s License Parsing
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
390
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing)
To program a parsing rule:
1.
Scan Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 392.
2.
Scan any of the field barcodes on the following pages, or Send Keystroke (Control Characters and
Keyboard Characters) on page 409.
3.
After entering the entire rule, scan Save Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 392 to save the rule.
NOTE: The scanner stores only one driver’s license parsing rule in memory at a time. Saving a new rule
replaces the prior rule.
To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming, scan Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule on
page 392. Any previously saved rule is retained.
To erase a saved rule, scan Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules on page 392.
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type
After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver's license, you can also apply standard ADF rules to
the parsed data using the Parsed Driver’s License criterion barcode in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer
Guide.
NOTE: Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver's license data when configured for Embedded Driver's
License Parsing.
See Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example on page 434 for a sample ADF rule using this code type
criterion.
391
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes
Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
Save Driver’s License Parse Rule
Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule
Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules
392
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
The supported parse fields begin below. Not all IDs present data in the same format. For example, some IDs can
have separate fields for first name, last name, and middle initial, while others have a single field with the entire
name. Also, some IDs expire on the subject's birth date while the expiration date field only indicates the year. To
present data in a consistent format, use the following nine barcodes to return data calculated from the actual data
contained in the ID barcode.
First Name
Middle Name/Initial
Last Name
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
Expiration Date
393
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Birth Date
Issue Date
ID Number (Formatted)
394
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
AAMVA Issuer ID
Full Name
Last Name
First Name
Middle Name / Initial
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
395
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Mailing Address Line 1
Mailing Address Line 2
Mailing Address City
Mailing Address State
Mailing Address Postal Code
Home Address Line 1
Home Address Line 2
396
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Home Address City
Home Address State
Home Address Postal Code
License ID Number
License Class
License Restrictions
License Endorsements
397
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Height (Feet and/or Inches)
Height (Centimeters)
Weight (Pounds)
Weight (Kilograms)
Eye Color
Hair Color
License Expiration Date
398
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Birth Date
Gender
License Issue Date
License Issue State
Social Security Number
Permit Class
Permit Expiration Date
399
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Permit ID Number
Permit Issue Date
Permit Restrictions
Permit Endorsements
AKA Social Security Name
AKA Full Name
AKA Last Name
400
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
AKA First Name
AKA Middle Name / Initial
AKA Name Suffix
AKA Name Prefix
AKA Birth Date
Issue Timestamp
Number of Duplicates
401
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Medical Codes
Organ Donor
Nonresident
Customer ID
Weight Range
Document Discriminator
Country
402
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Federal Commission Codes
Place of Birth
Audit Information
Inventory Control
Race / Ethnicity
Std Vehicle Class
Std Endorsements
403
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Std Restrictions
Class Description
Endorsement Description
Restrictions Description
Height in Inches
Height in Centimeters
Std Endorsements
404
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Parser Version ID Barcode
Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification.
Parser Version ID
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this barcode to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table 37 on page 436.
*Set All Defaults
Output Gender as M or F
Scan this barcode to report the gender as M or F instead of a numeric value.
Output gender as M or F
405
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Date Format
Use these barcodes to select the date format to display. Date fields include the following:
•
CCYY = 4-digit year (CC=2-digit century [00-99], YY=2-digit year in the century [00-99])
•
MM = 2-digit month [01-12]
•
DD = 2-digit day of the month [00-31]
The default is CCYYMMDD.
NOTE: To specify a date separator, i.e., a character separating each field of the date, scan the Send
<character> barcode that corresponds to the alphanumeric character to use as the date separator
immediately following the date format barcode. To select no date separator, scan the No Separator DL
parsing rule immediately following the date format barcode.
*CCYYMMDD
CCYYDDMM
MMDDCCYY
MMCCYYDD
406
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Date Format (continued)
DDMMCCYY
DDCCYYMM
YYMMDD
YYDDMM
MMDDYY
MMYYDD
407
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
DDMMYY
DDYYMM
No Separator
Scan this barcode immediately following a date format barcode to use no separator character between the date
fields.
No Separator
408
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keystroke to send.
Send Control A
Send Control B
Send Control C
Send Control D
Send Control E
Send Control F
Send Control G
409
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control H
Send Control I
Send Control J
Send Control K
Send Control L
Send Control M
Send Control N
410
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control O
Send Control P
Send Control Q
Send Control R
Send Control S
Send Control T
Send Control U
411
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control V
Send Control W
Send Control X
Send Control Y
Send Control Z
Send Control [
412
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control \
Send Control ]
Send Control 6
Send Control -
413
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keyboard characters to send.
Send Space
Send !
Send “
Send #
Send $
Send %
414
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send &
Send ‘
Send (
Send )
Send *
Send +
415
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send ,
Send -
Send .
Send /
Send 0
Send 1
416
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 2
Send 3
Send 4
Send 5
Send 6
Send 7
417
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 8
Send 9
Send :
Send ;
Send <
Send =
418
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send >
Send ?
Send @
Send A
Send B
Send C
419
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send D
Send E
Send F
Send G
Send H
Send I
420
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send J
Send K
Send L
Send M
Send N
Send O
421
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send P
Send Q
Send R
Send S
Send T
Send U
422
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send V
Send W
Send X
Send Y
Send Z
Send [
423
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send \
Send ]
Send ^
Send _
Send `
Send a
424
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send b
Send c
Send d
Send e
Send f
Send g
425
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send h
Send i
Send j
Send k
Send l
Send m
426
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send n
Send o
Send p
Send q
Send r
Send s
427
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send t
Send u
Send v
Send w
Send x
Send y
428
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send z
Send {
Send |
Send }
Send ~
Send Tab Key
Send Enter Key
429
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Parsing Rule Example
Scan the following barcodes in sequence to program the scanner to extract and transmit first, middle, and last
names; mailing address line 1; mailing address line 2; mailing address city; mailing address state; mailing address
postal code; and, date of birth. Then, scan a driver’s license barcode.
NOTE: This example applies to RS-232. To use this example with a USB interface, enable Function Key
Mapping on page 72 to send the Enter key properly.
1 - Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
2 - Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
3 - First Name
4 - Send Space
5 - Middle Name / Initial
6 - Send Space
430
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
7 - Last Name
8 - Send Enter Key
9 - Mailing Address Line 1
10 - Send Space
11 - Mailing Address Line 2
12 - Send Enter Key
431
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
13 - Mailing Address City
14 - Send Space
15 - Mailing Address State
16 - Send Space
17 - Mailing Address Postal Code
18 - Send Enter Key
432
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
19 - Birth Date
20 - Send Enter Key
21 - Save Driver’s Licence Parse Rule
433
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example
This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format:
Last Name, First Name
1 - Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
2 - Last Name
3 - Send ,
4 - Send Space
5 - First Name
6 - Save Driver’s Licence Parse Rule
434
Driver’s License Set Up (DSXXXX-DL)
Then, in order to limit the full name to 15 characters, create the following ADF rule:
1 - Begin New Rule
2 - Criterion: Parsed Driver's License
3 - Action: Send Next 15 Characters
4 - Save Rule
For a license belonging to Michael Williams, the parsed data is Williams, Michael and Williams, Micha after
applying the previous ADF rule.
435
Standard Parameter
Defaults
Introduction
Table 37
Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Send Versions
Software Version
N/A
N/A
N/A
49
Serial Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
49
Manufacturing Information
N/A
N/A
N/A
49
USB Device Type
N/A
N/A
USB HID Keyboard
62
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status
Handshaking
N/A
N/A
Enable
64
USB Keystroke Delay
N/A
N/A
No Delay
65
USB Caps Lock Override
N/A
N/A
Do Not Override (Disable)
65
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
N/A
N/A
Send Barcodes with
Unknown Characters
66
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39
N/A
N/A
Disable
66
USB Fast HID
N/A
N/A
Enable
67
USB Polling Interval
N/A
N/A
3 msec
68
Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Enable
70
Quick Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Enable
70
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
N/A
N/A
Enable
71
USB FN1 Substitution
N/A
N/A
Disable
71
Function Key Mapping
N/A
N/A
Disable
72
USB Host Parameters
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
436
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
N/A
Disable
72
Convert Case
N/A
N/A
None
73
USB Static CDC
N/A
N/A
Enable
74
CDC Beep on <BEL>
N/A
N/A
Enable
74
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep
N/A
N/A
Honor
75
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
N/A
N/A
Ignore
75
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration
Directive
N/A
N/A
Ignore
76
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
N/A
N/A
Version 2.2
76
Select SSI Host
N/A
N/A
N/A
89
Baud Rate
156
9Ch
9600
89
Parity
158
9Eh
None
91
Check Parity
151
97h
Disable
91
Stop Bits
157
9Dh
1
92
Software Handshaking
159
9Fh
Enable ACK/NAK
93
Host RTS Line State
154
9Ah
Low
94
Decode Data Packet Format
238
EEh
Send Raw Decode Data
94
Host Serial Response Timeout
155
9Bh
2 Seconds
95
Host Character Timeout
239
EFh
200 msec
96
Multipacket Option
334
F0h 4Eh
Option 1
97
Interpacket Delay
335
F0h 4Fh
0 msec
98
Decode Event
256
F0h 00h
Disable
99
Boot Up Event
258
F0h 02h
Disable
100
Parameter Event
259
F0h 03h
Disable
100
RS-232 Host Types
N/A
N/A
Standard
107
Baud Rate
N/A
N/A
9600
109
SSI Host Parameters
Event Reporting
RS-232 Host Parameters
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
437
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Parity
N/A
N/A
None
111
Stop Bits
N/A
N/A
1 Stop Bit
112
Data Bits
N/A
N/A
8-bit
112
Check Receive Errors
N/A
N/A
Enable
113
Hardware Handshaking
N/A
N/A
None
113
Software Handshaking
N/A
N/A
None
115
Host Serial Response Timeout
N/A
N/A
2 Seconds
117
RTS Line State
N/A
N/A
Low RTS
118
Beep on <BEL>
N/A
N/A
Disable
118
Intercharacter Delay
N/A
N/A
0 msec
119
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
N/A
N/A
Normal Operation
120
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
N/A
N/A
Send Barcode With
Unknown Characters
120
Port Address
N/A
N/A
None
125
Convert Unknown to Code 39
N/A
N/A
Disable
126
RS-485 Beep Directive
N/A
N/A
Ignore
126
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive
N/A
N/A
Ignore
127
IBM-485 Specification Version
N/A
N/A
Original Specification
127
Keyboard Wedge Host Type
N/A
N/A
IBM AT Notebook
131
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
N/A
N/A
Send Barcodes with
Unknown Characters
131
Keystroke Delay
N/A
N/A
No Delay
132
Intra-keystroke Delay
N/A
N/A
Disable
132
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Enable
133
Quick Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Enable
133
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
N/A
Disable
134
Caps Lock Override
N/A
N/A
Disable
134
Convert Case
N/A
N/A
Do Not Convert
135
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
438
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Function Key Mapping
N/A
N/A
Disable
136
FN1 Substitution
N/A
N/A
Disable
136
Send Make and Break
N/A
N/A
Send
137
Set Default Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
142
Parameter Barcode Scanning
236
ECh
Enable
143
Beep After Good Decode
56
38h
Enable
144
Beeper Volume
140
8Ch
High
145
Beeper Tone
145
91h
Medium
146
Beeper Duration
628
F1h 74h
Medium
147
Suppress Power Up Beeps
721
F1h D1h
Do Not Suppress
148
LED on Good Decode
744
F1h E8h
Enable
149
Direct Decode Indicator
859
F2h 5Bh
Disable
149
Decode Pager Motor
(DS4608-HC Only)
613
F1h 65h
Enable
150
Decode Pager Motor Duration (DS4608-HC
Only)
626
F1h 72h
150 msec
151
Night Mode Trigger (DS4608-HC Only)
1215
F8h 04h BFh
Enable
154
Night Mode Toggle (DS4608-HC Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
154
Low Power Mode
128
80h
Disable
155
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
146
92h
1 Hour
156
Trigger Mode (or Hand-held Trigger Mode)
138
8Ah
Auto Aim
158
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
306
F0h 32h
Enable
159
Hands-free (Presentation) Decode Aiming
Pattern
590
F1h 4Eh
Disable Hands-free
(Presentation) Decode
Aiming Pattern
160
Hands-free Mode
630
F1h 76h
Enable
161
Picklist Mode
402
F0h 92h
Disable Picklist Mode Always
162
Continuous Barcode Read
649
F1h 89h
Disable
163
Unique Barcode Reporting
723
F1h D3h
Enable
164
User Preferences
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
439
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Decode Session Timeout
136
88h
9.9 Seconds
164
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
137
89h
0.5 Seconds
165
Timeout Between Decodes, Different
Symbols
144
90h
0.1 Seconds
165
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
724
F1h D4h
Disable
166
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
716
F1h CCh
Normal
167
PDF Prioritization
719
F4h F1h CFh
Disable
168
PDF Prioritization Timeout
720
F1h D0h
200 ms
169
Presentation Mode Field of View
609
F1h 61h
Full
170
Decoding Illumination
298
F0h 2Ah
Enable
171
Illumination Brightness
669
F1h 9Dh
High
172
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Mode
Only)
858
F2h 5Ah
Less
173
Product ID (PID) Type
1281
F8h 05h 01h
Host Type Unique
174
Product ID (PID) Value
1725
F8h 06h BDh
0
174
ECLevel
1710
F8h 06h AEh
0
175
DPM Illumination
429
F0h ADh
Cycle Illumination
176
DPM Mode
1438
F8h 05h 9Eh
Enable
177
Enter Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
178
Tab Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
178
Transmit Code ID Character
45
2Dh
None
179
Prefix Value
99, 105
63h, 69h
7013 <CR><LF>
180
Suffix 1 Value
98, 104
62h, 68h
7013 <CR><LF>
180
Suffix 2 Value
100, 106
64h, 6Ah
Scan Data Transmission Format
235
EBh
Data As Is
181
FN1 Substitution Values
103, 109
67h, 6Dh
7013 <CR><LF>
183
Transmit “No Read” Message
94
5E
Disable
184
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
1118
F8h 04h 5Eh
Disable
185
Parameter
Default
Page #
DPM Parameters (DS4608-DPE Only)
Miscellaneous Options
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
440
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
securPharm Decoding
1752
F8h 06h D8h
Disable
186
securPharm Output Formatting
1753
F8h 06h D9h
No Formatting
187
Operational Modes
N/A
N/A
N/A
193
Image Capture Illumination
361
F0h 69h
Enable
194
Image Capture Autoexposure
360
F0h 68h
Enable
194
Fixed Exposure
567
F4h F1h 37h
100
195
Analog Gain
1232
F4h D0h
Analog Gain x 2
196
Digital Gain
1233
F4h D1h
32
196
Snapshot Mode Timeout
323
F0h 43h
0 (30 seconds)
197
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
300
F0h 2Ch
Enable
198
Silence Operational Mode Changes
1293
F8h 05h 0Dh
Disable (do not silence)
198
Image Cropping
301
F0h 2Dh
Disable
199
Crop to Pixel Addresses
315
316
317
318
F4h F0h 3Bh
F4h F0h 3Ch
F4h F0h 3Dh
F4h F0h 3Eh
0 top
0 left
799 bottom
1279 right
199
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
302
F0h 2Eh
Full
201
Image Brightness (Target White)
390
F0h 86h
180
202
JPEG Image Options
299
F0h 2Bh
Quality
202
JPEG Quality Value
305
F0h 31h
65
203
JPEG Size Value
561
F1h 31h
160 kB
203
Image Enhancement
564
F1h 34h
Low (1)
204
Image File Format Selector
304
F0h 30h
JPEG
205
Image Rotation
665
F1h 99h
0
206
Bits per Pixel (BPP)
303
F0h 2Fh
8 BPP
207
Signature Capture
93
5Dh
Disable
208
Signature Capture Image File Format
Selection
313
F0h 39h
JPEG
209
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP)
314
F0h 3Ah
8 BPP
210
Image Capture Preferences
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
441
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Signature Capture Width
366
F4h F0h 6Eh
400
211
Signature Capture Height
367
F4h F0h 6Fh
100
211
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
421
F0h A5h
65
212
Video Mode Format Selector
916
F2h 94h
JPEG
212
Video View Finder
324
F0h 44h
Disable
213
Target Video Frame Size
328
F0h 48h
2200 bytes
213
Video View Finder Image Size
329
F0h 49h
1700 bytes
214
Video Resolution
667
F1h 9Bh
1/4 resolution
214
Symbologies
Enable/Disable All Code Types
223
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
1
01h
Enable
224
UPC-E
2
02h
Enable
224
UPC-E1
12
0Ch
Disable
225
EAN-8/JAN 8
4
04h
Enable
225
EAN-13/JAN 13
3
03h
Enable
226
Bookland EAN
83
53h
Disable
226
Bookland ISBN Format
576
F1h 40h
ISBN-10
227
ISSN EAN
617
F1h 69h
Disable
228
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits)
16
10h
Ignore
229
000
232
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
579
F4h F1h 43h
Supplemental 2:
580
F4h F1h 44h
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
80
50h
10
232
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format
672
F1h A0h
Combined
233
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
40
28h
Enable
234
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
41
29h
Enable
234
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
442
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
42
2Ah
Enable
235
UPC-A Preamble
34
22h
System Character
236
UPC-E Preamble
35
23h
System Character
237
UPC-E1 Preamble
36
24h
System Character
238
Convert UPC-E to A
37
25h
Disable
239
Convert UPC-E1 to A
38
26h
Disable
239
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
39
27h
Disable
240
UCC Coupon Extended Code
85
55h
Disable
240
Coupon Report
730
F1h DAh
New Coupon Format
241
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
1289
F8h 05h 09h
Disable
242
Code 128
8
08h
Enable
242
Set Length(s) for Code 128
209, 210
D1h, D2h
Any Length
243
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
14
0Eh
Enable
244
ISBT 128
84
54h
Enable
245
ISBT Concatenation
577
F1h 41h
Disable
246
Code 128
Enable for DS4608-HC
Check ISBT Table
578
F1h 42h
Enable
247
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
223
DFh
10
247
Code 128 <FNC4>
1254
F8h 04h E6h
Honor
248
Code 128 Security Level
751
F1h EFh
Security Level 1
249
Security Level 2 for
DS4608-HC
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
1208
F8h 04h B8h
Disable
250
Code 39
0
00h
Enable
250
Trioptic Code 39
13
0Dh
Disable
251
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(Italian Pharmacy Code)
86
56h
Disable
251
Code 39
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
443
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Code 32 Prefix
231
E7h
Disable
252
Set Length(s) for Code 39
18, 19
12h, 13h
1 to 55
252
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
48
30h
Disable
254
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
43
2Bh
Disable
254
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
17
11h
Disable
255
Code 39 Security Level
750
F1h EEh
Security Level 1
256
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
1209
F8h 04h B9h
Disable
258
Code 93
9
09h
Enable
258
Set Length(s) for Code 93
26, 27
1Ah, 1Bh
1 to 55
259
Code 11
10
0Ah
Disable
261
Set Lengths for Code 11
28, 29
1Ch, 1Dh
4 to 55
261
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
52
34h
Disable
263
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
47
2Fh
Disable
264
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
6
06h
Enable
264
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5
22, 23
16h, 17h
6 to 55
265
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
49
31h
Disable
267
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
44
2Ch
Disable
267
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
82
52h
Disable
268
Febraban
1750
F8h 06h D6h
Disable
268
I 2 of 5 Security Level
1121
F8h 04h 61h
Security Level 1
269
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
1210
F8h 04h BAh
Disable
270
Discrete 2 of 5
5
05h
Disable
270
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5
20, 21
14h 15h
1 to 55
271
Code 93
Code 11
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
444
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar
7
07h
Enable
273
Set Lengths for Codabar
24, 25
18h, 19h
4 to 55
273
CLSI Editing
54
36h
Disable
275
NOTIS Editing
55
37h
Disable
275
Codabar Security Level
1776
F8h 06h F0h
Security Level 1
276
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/
Stop Characters Detection
855
F2h 57h
Upper Case
277
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification
1784
F8h 06h F8h
Disable
277
Transmit Codabar Check Digit
704
F1h C0h
Disable
278
MSI
11
0Bh
Disable
278
Set Length(s) for MSI
30, 31
1Eh, 1Fh
4 to 55
279
MSI Check Digits
50
32h
One
280
Transmit MSI Check Digit
46
2Eh
Disable
281
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
51
33h
Mod 10/Mod 10
281
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
1392
F8h 05h 70h
Disable
282
408
F0h 98h
Disable
282
Matrix 2 of 5
618
F1h 6Ah
Disable
283
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths
619
620
F1h 6Bh
F1h 6Ch
4 to 55
283
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
622
F1h 6Eh
Disable
285
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
623
F1h 6Fh
Disable
285
Korean 3 of 5
581
F1h 45h
Disable
286
Inverse 1D
586
F1h 4Ah
Regular
287
MSI
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
445
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
338
F0h 52h
Enable
288
GS1 DataBar Limited
339
F0h 53h
Enable
288
GS1 DataBar Expanded
340
F0h 54h
Enable
289
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
397
F0h 8Dh
Disable
289
GS1 DataBar Security Level
1706
F8h 06h AAh
Level 1
290
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check
728
F1h D8h
Level 3
291
Redundancy Level
78
4Eh
1
293
Security Level
77
4Dh
1
295
1D Quiet Zone Level
1288
F8h 05h 08h
1
296
Intercharacter Gap Size
381
F0h 7Dh
Normal
297
Composite CC-C
341
F0h 55h
Disable
298
Composite CC-A/B
342
F0h 56h
Disable
298
Composite TLC-39
371
F0h 73h
Disable
299
Composite Inverse
1113
F8h 04h 59h
Regular
299
UPC Composite Mode
344
F0h 58h
UPC Never Linked
300
Composite Beep Mode
398
F0h 8Eh
Beep As Each Code Type is
Decoded
301
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN
Composite Codes
427
F0h ABh
Disable
302
PDF417
15
0Fh
Enable
303
MicroPDF417
227
E3h
Disable
303
Code 128 Emulation
123
7Bh
Disable
304
Data Matrix
292
F0h 24h
Enable
305
GS1 Data Matrix
1336
F8h 05h 38h
Disable
305
Data Matrix Inverse
588
F1h 4Ch
Inverse Autodetect
306
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Composite Codes
2D Symbologies
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
446
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images
537
F1h 19h
Auto
307
Maxicode
294
F0h 26h
Disable
308
QR Code
293
F0h 25h
Enable
309
GS1 QR
1343
F8h 05h 3Fh
Enable
309
MicroQR
573
F1h 3Dh
Enable
310
Linked QR Mode
1847
737h
Linked QR Only
311
Aztec
574
F1h 3Eh
Enable
312
Aztec Inverse
589
F1h 4Dh
Inverse Autodetect
313
Han Xin
1167
F8h 04h 8Fh
Disable
314
Han Xin Inverse
1168
F8h 04h 90h
Regular
315
Grid Matrix
1718
F8h 06h B6h
Disable
316
Grid Matrix Inverse
1719
F8h 06h B7h
Regular
317
Grid Matrix Mirror
1736
F8h 06h C8h
Regular Only
318
DotCode
1906
F8 07 72h
Disable
319
DotCode Inverse
1907
F8 07 73h
Inverse Autodetect
320
DotCode Mirrored
1908
F8 07 74h
Autodetect
321
DotCode Prioritize
1937
F8 07 91h
Enable
322
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
N/A
N/A
N/A
323
Abort Macro PDF Entry
N/A
N/A
N/A
323
US Postnet
89
59h
Disable
324
US Planet
90
5Ah
Disable
324
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
95
5Fh
Enable
325
UK Postal
91
5Bh
Disable
325
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
96
60h
Enable
326
Japan Postal
290
F0h 22h
Disable
326
Australia Post
291
F0h 23h
Disable
327
Australia Post Format
718
F1h CEh
Autodiscriminate
328
Macro PDF
Postal Codes
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
447
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
Netherlands KIX Code
326
F0h 46h
Disable
329
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
592
F1h 50h
Disable
329
UPU FICS Postal
611
F1h 63h
Disable
330
Mailmark
1337
F8h 05h 39h
Disable
330
OCR-A
680
F1h A8h
Disable
333
OCR-A Variant
684
F1h ACh
Full ASCII
334
OCR-B
681
F1h A9h
Disable
336
OCR-B Variant
685
F1h ADh
Full ASCII
337
MICR E13B
682
F1h AAh
Disable
341
US Currency
683
F1h ABh
Disable
342
OCR Orientation
687
F1h AFh
0o
342
OCR Lines
691
F1h B3h
1
344
OCR Minimum Characters
689
F1h B1h
3
344
OCR Maximum Characters
690
F1h B2h
100
345
OCR Subset
686
F1h AEh
Selected font variant
345
OCR Quiet Zone
695
F1h B7h
50
346
OCR Template
547
F1h 23h
99999999
347
OCR Check Digit Modulus
688
F1h B0h
1
356
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
700
F1h BCh
121212121212
357
OCR Check Digit Validation
694
F1h B6h
None
359
Inverse OCR
856
F2h 58h
Regular
364
OCR Redundancy
1770
F8h 06h EAh
Level 1
365
OCR Programming Parameters
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode
594
F1h 52h
Off
371
IDC Symbology
655
F1h 8Fh
001
372
IDC X Coordinate
596
F4h F1h 54h
-151
373
IDC Y Coordinate
597
F4h F1h 55h
-050
373
IDC Width
598
F1h 56h
0300
374
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
448
Standard Parameter Defaults
Table 37
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Default
Page #
IDC Height
599
F1h 57h
0050
374
IDC Aspect
595
F1h 53h
000
375
IDC File Format Selector
601
F1h 59h
JPEG
375
IDC Bits Per Pixel
602
F1h 5Ah
8 BPP
376
IDC JPEG Quality
603
F1h 5Bh
065
377
IDC Find Box Outline
727
F1h D7h
Disable
377
IDC Minimum Text Length
656
F1h 90h
00
378
IDC Maximum Text Length
657
F1h 91h
00
378
IDC Captured Image Brighten
654
F1h 8Eh
Enable
379
IDC Captured Image Sharpen
658
F1h 92h
Enable
380
IDC Border Type
829
F2h 3Dh
None
381
IDC Delay Time
830
F2h 3Eh
000
382
IDC Zoom Limit
651
F1h 8Bh
000
382
IDC Maximum Rotation
652
F1h 8Ch
00
383
Driver’s License Parsing
N/A
N/A
No Driver’s License Parsing
390
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields
N/A
N/A
N/A
391
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes
N/A
N/A
N/A
392
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
N/A
N/A
N/A
395
Set Default Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
405
Output Gender as M or F
N/A
N/A
N/A
405
Date Format
N/A
N/A
CCYYMMDD
406
No Separator
N/A
N/A
N/A
408
Send Keystroke
N/A
N/A
N/A
409
Parsing Rule Example
N/A
N/A
N/A
430
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing ADF
Example
N/A
N/A
N/A
434
DL Parsing Parameters
Control Characters
Keyboard Characters
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
449
Numeric Barcodes
Numeric Barcodes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered barcode(s).
0
1
2
3
450
Numeric Barcodes
Numeric Barcodes (continued)
4
5
6
7
8
9
451
Numeric Barcodes
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the barcode below.
Cancel
452
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the following barcode.
Cancel
453
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Space
#
$
%
*
+
454
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
-
.
/
!
“
&
455
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
‘
(
)
:
;
<
456
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
=
>
?
@
[
\
457
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
]
^
_
`
458
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
NOTE: Do not confuse the following barcodes with those on the numeric keypad.
0
1
2
3
4
5
459
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
6
7
8
9
End of Message
Cancel
460
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
A
B
C
D
E
F
461
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
G
H
I
J
K
L
462
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
M
N
O
P
Q
R
463
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
S
T
U
V
W
X
464
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
465
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
e
f
g
h
i
j
466
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
k
l
m
n
o
p
467
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
q
r
s
t
u
v
468
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
w
x
y
z
{
|
469
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
}
~
470
ASCII Character Sets
NOTE: For the Keyboard Wedge Interface, Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the barcode special character
($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example,
if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B, it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning
ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.
Table 38
ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
1000
%U
CTRL 2
NUL
1001
$A
CTRL A
SOH
1002
$B
CTRL B
STX
1003
$C
CTRL C
ETX
1004
$D
CTRL D
EOT
1005
$E
CTRL E
ENQ
1006
$F
CTRL F
ACK
1007
$G
CTRL G
BELL
1008
$H
CTRL H/BACKSPACE1
BCKSPC
1009
$I
CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1
HORIZ TAB
1010
$J
CTRL J
LF/NW LN
1011
$K
CTRL K
VT
1012
$L
CTRL L
FF
1013
$M
CTRL M/ENTER1
CR/ENTER
1014
$N
CTRL N
SO
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 72 or page 136.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
471
ASCII Character Sets
Table 38
ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
Keystroke
1015
$O
CTRL O
SI
1016
$P
CTRL P
DLE
1017
$Q
CTRL Q
DC1/XON
1018
$R
CTRL R
DC2
1019
$S
CTRL S
DC3/XOFF
1020
$T
CTRL T
DC4
1021
$U
CTRL U
NAK
1022
$V
CTRL V
SYN
1023
$W
CTRL W
ETB
1024
$X
CTRL X
CAN
1025
$Y
CTRL Y
EM
1026
$Z
CTRL Z
SUB
1027
%A
CTRL [
ESC
1028
%B
CTRL \
FS
1029
%C
CTRL ]
GS
1030
%D
CTRL 6
RS
1031
%E
CTRL -
US
1032
Space
Space
Space
1033
/A
!
!
1034
/B
“
"
1035
/C
#
#
1036
/D
$
$
1037
/E
%
%
1038
/F
&
&
1039
/G
‘
‘
1040
/H
(
(
1041
/I
)
)
1042
/J
*
*
1043
/K
+
+
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 72 or page 136.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
472
ASCII Character Sets
Table 38
ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
1044
/L
,
,
1045
-
-
-
1046
.
.
.
1047
/o
/
/
1048
0
0
0
1049
1
1
1
1050
2
2
2
1051
3
3
3
1052
4
4
4
1053
5
5
5
1054
6
6
6
1055
7
7
7
1056
8
8
8
1057
9
9
9
1058
/Z
:
:
1059
%F
;
;
1060
%G
<
<
1061
%H
=
=
1062
%I
>
>
1063
%J
?
?
1064
%V
@
@
1065
A
A
A
1066
B
B
B
1067
C
C
C
1068
D
D
D
1069
E
E
E
1070
F
F
F
1071
G
G
G
1072
H
H
H
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 72 or page 136.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
473
ASCII Character Sets
Table 38
ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
1073
I
I
I
1074
J
J
J
1075
K
K
K
1076
L
L
L
1077
M
M
M
1078
N
N
N
1079
O
O
O
1080
P
P
P
1081
Q
Q
Q
1082
R
R
R
1083
S
S
S
1084
T
T
T
1085
U
U
U
1086
V
V
V
1087
W
W
W
1088
X
X
X
1089
Y
Y
Y
1090
Z
Z
Z
1091
%K
[
[
1092
%L
\
\
1093
%M
]
]
1094
%N
^
^
1095
%O
_
_
1096
%W
‘
`
1097
+A
a
a
1098
+B
b
b
1099
+C
c
c
1100
+D
d
d
1101
+E
e
e
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 72 or page 136.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
474
ASCII Character Sets
Table 38
ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
Keystroke
1102
+F
f
f
1103
+G
g
g
1104
+H
h
h
1105
+I
i
i
1106
+J
j
j
1107
+K
k
k
1108
+L
l
l
1109
+M
m
m
1110
+N
n
n
1111
+O
o
o
1112
+P
p
p
1113
+Q
q
q
1114
+R
r
r
1115
+S
s
s
1116
+T
t
t
1117
+U
u
u
1118
+V
v
v
1119
+W
w
w
1120
+X
x
x
1121
+Y
y
y
1122
+Z
z
z
1123
%P
{
{
1124
%Q
I
|
1125
%R
}
}
1126
%S
~
~
1127
Undefined
7013
ENTER
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 72 or page 136.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
475
ASCII Character Sets
Table 39
ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys
Keystroke
2045
ALT -
2050
ALT 2
2054
ALT 6
2064
ALT @
2065
ALT A
2066
ALT B
2067
ALT C
2068
ALT D
2069
ALT E
2070
ALT F
2071
ALT G
2072
ALT H
2073
ALT I
2074
ALT J
2075
ALT K
2076
ALT L
2077
ALT M
2078
ALT N
2079
ALT O
2080
ALT P
2081
ALT Q
2082
ALT R
2083
ALT S
2084
ALT T
2085
ALT U
2086
ALT V
2087
ALT W
2088
ALT X
2089
ALT Y
2090
ALT Z
476
ASCII Character Sets
Table 39
ALT Key Character Set (Continued)
ALT Keys
Keystroke
2091
ALT [
2092
ALT \
2093
ALT ]
Table 40
GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key
Keystroke
3000
Right Control Key
3048
GUI 0
3049
GUI 1
3050
GUI 2
3051
GUI 3
3052
GUI 4
3053
GUI 5
3054
GUI 6
3055
GUI 7
3056
GUI 8
3057
GUI 9
3065
GUI A
3066
GUI B
3067
GUI C
3068
GUI D
3069
GUI E
3070
GUI F
3071
GUI G
3072
GUI H
3073
GUI I
3074
GUI J
3075
GUI K
3076
GUI L
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple ™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on
either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the
left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
477
ASCII Character Sets
Table 40
GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key
Keystroke
3077
GUI M
3078
GUI N
3079
GUI O
3080
GUI P
3081
GUI Q
3082
GUI R
3083
GUI S
3084
GUI T
3085
GUI U
3086
GUI V
3087
GUI W
3088
GUI X
3089
GUI Y
3090
GUI Z
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple ™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on
either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the
left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
Table 41
PF Key Character Set
PF Keys
Keystroke
4001
PF 1
4002
PF 2
4003
PF 3
4004
PF 4
4005
PF 5
4006
PF 6
4007
PF 7
4008
PF 8
4009
PF 9
4010
PF 10
4011
PF 11
4012
PF 12
478
ASCII Character Sets
Table 41
PF Key Character Set (Continued)
PF Keys
Keystroke
4013
PF 13
4014
PF 14
4015
PF 15
4016
PF 16
Table 42
F Key Character Set
F Keys
Keystroke
5001
F1
5002
F2
5003
F3
5004
F4
5005
F5
5006
F6
5007
F7
5008
F8
5009
F9
5010
F 10
5011
F 11
5012
F 12
5013
F 13
5014
F 14
5015
F 15
5016
F 16
5017
F 17
5018
F 18
5019
F 19
5020
F 20
5021
F 21
5022
F 22
5023
F 23
5024
F 24
479
ASCII Character Sets
Table 43
Numeric Key Character Set
Numeric Keypad
Keystroke
6042
*
6043
+
6044
Undefined
6045
-
6046
.
6047
/
6048
0
6049
1
6050
2
6051
3
6052
4
6053
5
6054
6
6055
7
6056
8
6057
9
6058
Enter
6059
Num Lock
Table 44
Extended Key Character Set
Extended Keypad
Keystroke
7001
Break
7002
Delete
7003
Pg Up
7004
End
7005
Pg Dn
7006
Pause
7007
Scroll Lock
7008
Backspace
7009
Tab
480
ASCII Character Sets
Table 44
Extended Key Character Set (Continued)
Extended Keypad
Keystroke
7010
Print Screen
7011
Insert
7012
Home
7013
Enter
7014
Escape
7015
Up Arrow
7016
Dn Arrow
7017
Left Arrow
7018
Right Arrow
481
Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers
Table 45
Symbol Code Characters
Code Character
Code Type
A
UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13
B
Code 39, Code 32
C
Codabar
D
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated
E
Code 93
F
Interleaved 2 of 5
G
Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
H
Code 11
J
MSI
K
GS1-128
L
Bookland EAN
M
Trioptic Code 39
N
Coupon Code
R
GS1 DataBar Family
S
Matrix 2 of 5
T
UCC Composite, TLC 39
U
Chinese 2 of 5
V
Korean 3 of 5
X
ISSN EAN, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
z
Aztec, Aztec Rune
482
Programming Reference
Table 45
Symbol Code Characters (Continued)
Code Character
Code Type
P00
Data Matrix
P01
QR Code, MicroQR
P02
Maxicode
P03
US Postnet
P04
US Planet
P05
Japan Postal
P06
UK Postal
P08
Netherlands KIX Code
P09
Australia Post
P0A
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
P0B
UPU FICS Postal
P0C
Mailmark
P0D
Grid Matrix
P0G
GS1 Data Matrix
P0H
Han Xin
P0Q
GS1 QR
P0X
Signature Capture
483
Programming Reference
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
]
c
m
Table 46
=
=
=
Flag Character (ASCII 93)
Code Character (see Table 46)
Modifier Character (see Table 47)
Aim Code Characters
Code Character
Code Type
A
Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128,
Coupon (Code 128 portion)
d
Data Matrix, GS1 Data Matrix
E
UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
e
GS1 DataBar Family
F
Codabar
G
Code 93
g
Grid Matrix
H
Code 11
h
Han Xin
I
Interleaved 2 of 5
L
PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
L2
TLC 39
M
MSI
Q
QR Code, MicroQR, GS1 QR
S
Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
U
Maxicode
z
Aztec, Aztec Rune
X
Bookland EAN, ISSN EAN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5,
Matrix 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal,
Japan Postal, Australia Post, Netherlands KIX Code, USPS
4CB/One Code/ Intelligent Mail, UPU FICS Postal, Mailmark,
Signature Capture
484
Programming Reference
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table 47.
Table 47
Modifier Characters
Code Type
Code 39
Option Value
Option
0
No check character or Full ASCII processing.
1
Reader has checked one check character.
3
Reader has checked and stripped check character.
4
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
5
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and
checked one check character.
7
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and
checked and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII barcode with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as
]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39
0
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic barcode 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356
Code 128
0
Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.
1
Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
2
Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 barcode with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first
position, AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID
I 2 of 5
0
No check digit processing.
1
Reader has validated check digit.
3
Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123
Codabar
0
No check digit processing.
1
Reader has checked check digit.
3
Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123
Code 93
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905
MSI
0
Check digits are sent.
1
No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI barcode 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as
]M14123
485
Programming Reference
Table 47
Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
D 2 of 5
Option Value
0
Option
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 barcode 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123
UPC/EAN
0
Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e., 13 digits for UPC-A,
UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).
1
Two digit supplemental data only.
2
Five digit supplemental data only.
3
Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A
or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.
4
EAN-8 data packet.
Example: A UPC-A barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E0012345678905
Bookland EAN
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
ISSN EAN
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: An ISSN EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
Code 11
GS1 DataBar
Family
0
Single check digit
1
Two check digits
3
Check characters validated but not transmitted.
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar
Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an
Application Identifier “01”.
Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted
using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).
Example: A GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode 0110012345678902 is transmitted
as ]e00110012345678902.
486
Programming Reference
Table 47
Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
EAN.UCC
Composites
(GS1 DataBar,
GS1-128,
2D portion of
UPC composite)
Option Value
Option
Native mode transmission.
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
0
Standard data packet.
1
Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol
separator character.
2
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.
3
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.
GS1-128 emulation
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
PDF417,
Micro PDF417
1
Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with
]JC1).
0
Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417
symbology specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted,
the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been
invoked or whether data byte 92DEC has been doubled in
transmission.
1
Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel
Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are doubled.
2
Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character
transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC are not doubled.
Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro
symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape
sequences cannot be transmitted.
3
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is
903-907, 912, 914, 915.
4
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is
in the range 908-909.
5
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is
in the range 910-911.
Example: A PDF417 barcode ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is
transmitted as ]L2ABCD.
487
Programming Reference
Table 47
Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Data Matrix
Option Value
Option
0
ECC 000-140, not supported.
1
ECC 200.
2
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
3
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.
4
ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.
5
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.
6
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol
implemented.
GS1 Data Matrix
2
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
MaxiCode
0
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.
1
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.
2
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.
3
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary
message.
0
Model 1 symbol.
1
Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.
2
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.
3
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
first position.
4
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first
position.
5
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
second position.
6
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in
second position.
GS1 QR
3
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
first position.
Aztec
0
Aztec symbol.
C
Aztec Rune symbol.
0
Generic data, no special features are set. The transmitted data
does not follow the AIM ECI protocol.
1
ECI protocol enabled. There is at least one ECI mode encoded.
Transmitted data must follow the AIM ECI protocol.
0
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
QR Code
Han Xin
Mailmark
488
Communication Protocol
Functionality
Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface
Table 48 lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.
Table 48
Communication Interface Functionality
Functionality
Communication Interfaces
Data
Transmission
Remote
Management
Image and Video
Transmission
USB
HID Keyboard Emulation
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Simple COM Port Emulation
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
CDC COM Port Emulation
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
SSI over CDC COM Port Emulation
Supported
Supported
Supported
IBM Table-top USB
Supported
Supported
Not Available
IBM Hand-held USB
Supported
Supported
Not Available
USB OPOS Hand-held
Supported
Supported
Not Available
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without
Imaging Interface
Supported
Supported
Not Available
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging
Interface
Supported
Supported
Supported
Standard RS-232
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
ICL RS-232
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Fujitsu RS-232
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Olivetti ORS4500
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
RS-232
489
Communication Protocol Functionality
Table 48
Communication Interface Functionality (Continued)
Functionality
Communication Interfaces
Data
Transmission
Remote
Management
Image and Video
Transmission
Omron
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
CUTE
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
OPOS/JPOS
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
SSI
Supported
Supported
Supported
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
Supported
Supported
Not Available
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Supported
Supported
Not Available
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
IBM AT Notebook
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
IBM 4690
Keyboard Wedge
490
Country Codes
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the keyboard to interface with a USB or keyboard wedge host.
The host powers the scanner. For host setup information, see USB Interface and Keyboard Wedge Interface.
To select a code page for the country keyboard type, see Country Code Pages.
Throughout the programming barcode menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
Feature/option
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the barcode corresponding to the keyboard type. For a USB host, this setting applies only to the USB
Keyboard (HID) device. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Keypad Emulation on page 70 for the USB HID host.
For a keyboard wedge host, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 133.
NOTES 1When changing USB country keyboard types the scanner automatically resets and issues the standard
startup beep sequences.
2. For best results when using international keyboards, enable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 70.
IMPORTANT: Some country keyboard barcode types are specific to certain Windows operating systems
(i.e., XP and Windows 7 or higher). Barcodes requiring a specific Windows OS are noted in the
barcode captions.
Use the French International barcode for Belgian French keyboards.
491
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes
*US English (North American)
US English (Mac)
Albanian
Arabic (101)
Arabic (102)
492
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Arabic (102) AZERTY
Azeri (Latin)
Azeri (Cyrillic)
Belarusian
Bosnian (Latin)
Bosnian (Cyrillic)
493
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Bulgarian (Latin)
Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter)
(Bulgarian -Windows XP
Typewriter - Windows 7 or higher)
Canadian French Win7
Canadian French (Legacy)
Canadian Multilingual Standard
Chinese (ASCII)
494
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Chinese (Simplified)*
Chinese (Traditional)*
*For CJK keyboard types, see CJK Decode Control.
Croatian
Czech
Czech (Programmer)
Czech (QWERTY)
495
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Danish
Dutch (Netherlands)
Estonian
Faeroese
Finnish
French (France)
496
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
French International
(Belgian French)
French (Canada) 95/98
French (Canada) 2000/XP*
*There is also a country code barcode for Canadian
Multilingual Standard on page 494. Be sure to select
the appropriate barcode for your host system.
Galician
German
Greek Latin
497
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Greek (220) Latin
Greek (319) Latin
Greek
Greek (220)
Greek (319)
Greek Polytonic
498
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Hebrew Israel
Hungarian
Hungarian_101KEY
Icelandic
Irish
Italian
499
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Italian (142)
Japanese (ASCII)
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS)*
Kazakh
Korean (ASCII)
Korean (Hangul)*
*For CJK keyboard types, see CJK Decode Control.
500
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Kyrgyz
Latin American
Latvian
Latvian (QWERTY)
Lithuanian
Lithuanian (IBM)
501
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Macedonian (FYROM)
Maltese_47KEY
Mongolian
Norwegian
Polish (214)
Polish (Programmer)
502
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Portuguese (Brazil)
(Windows XP)
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT)
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2)
Portuguese (Portugal)
Romanian
(Windows XP)
Romanian (Legacy)
(Windows 7 or higher)
503
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Romanian (Standard)
(Windows 7 or higher)
Romanian (Programmer)
(Windows 7 or higher)
Russian
Russian (Typewriter)
Serbian (Latin)
Serbian (Cyrillic)
504
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Slovak
Slovak (QWERTY)
Slovenian
Spanish
Spanish (Variation)
Swedish
505
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Swiss French
Swiss German
Tatar
Thai (Kedmanee)
Turkish F
Turkish Q
506
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
UK English
Ukrainian
US Dvorak
US Dvorak Left
US Dvorak Right
US International
507
Country Codes
Country Code Barcodes (continued)
Uzbek
Vietnamese
508
Country Code Pages
Introduction
This chapter provides barcodes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type selected in Country Codes.
If the default code page in Table 49 is appropriate for your selected country keyboard type, you do not need to
scan a country code page barcode.
NOTE: ADF rules can also specify a code page based on the symbology and other ADF criteria. Refer to the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Country Code Page Defaults
Table 49 lists the code page default for each country keyboard.
Table 49
Country Code Page Defaults
Country Keyboard
Code Page Default
US English (North American)
Windows 1252
US English (Mac)
Mac CP10000
Albanian
Windows 1250
Arabic 101
Windows 1256
Arabic 102
Windows 1256
Arabic 102 AZERTY
Windows 1256
Azeri Latin
Windows 1254
Azeri Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Belarusian
Windows 1251
Bosnian Latin
Windows 1250
Bosnian Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Bulgarian Latin
Windows 1250
Bulgarian Cyrillic
Windows 1251
509
Country Code Pages
Table 49
Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Code Page Default
Canadian French Win7
Windows 1252
Canadian French (Legacy)
Windows 1252
Canadian Multilingual
Windows 1252
Croatian
Windows 1250
Chinese ASCII
Windows 1252
Chinese (Simplified)
Windows 936, GBK
Chinese (Traditional)
Windows 950, Big5
Czech
Windows 1250
Czech Programmers
Windows 1250
Czech QWERTY
Windows 1250
Danish
Windows 1252
Dutch Netherland
Windows 1252
Estonian
Windows 1257
Faeroese
Windows 1252
Finnish
Windows 1252
French (France)
Windows 1252
French (Canada) 95/98
Windows 1252
French (Canada) 2000/XP
Windows 1252
French International (Belgian French)
Windows 1252
Galician
Windows 1252
German
Windows 1252
Greek Latin
Windows 1252
Greek220 Latin
Windows 1253
Greek319 Latin
Windows 1252
Greek
Windows 1253
Greek220
Windows 1253
Greek319
Windows 1253
Greek Polytonic
Windows 1253
Hebrew Israel
Windows 1255
Hungarian
Windows 1250
Hungarian_101KEY
Windows 1250
510
Country Code Pages
Table 49
Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Code Page Default
Icelandic
Windows 1252
Irish
Windows 1252
Italian
Windows 1252
Italian_142
Windows 1252
Japanese ASCII
Windows 1252
Japanese (Shift-JIS)
Windows 932, Shift-JIS
Kazakh
Windows 1251
Korean ASCII
Windows 1252
Korean (Hangul)
Windows 949, Hangul
Kyrgyz Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Latin America
Windows 1252
Latvian
Windows 1257
Latvian QWERTY
Windows 1257
Lithuanian
Windows 1257
Lithuanian_IBM
Windows 1257
Macedonian -FYROM
Windows 1251
Maltese_47KEY
Windows 1252
Mongolian-Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Norwegian
Windows 1252
Polish_214
Windows 1250
Polish Programmer
Windows 1250
Portuguese Brazil
Windows 1252
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT
Windows 1252
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT2
Windows 1252
Portuguese Portugal
Windows 1252
Romanian
Windows 1250
Romanian Legacy
Windows 1250
Romanian Standard
Windows 1250
Romanian Programmer
Windows 1250
Russian
Windows 1251
Russian Typewriter
Windows 1251
511
Country Code Pages
Table 49
Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Code Page Default
Serbian Latin
Windows 1250
Serbian Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Slovak
Windows 1250
Slovak QWERTY
Windows 1250
Slovenian
Windows 1250
Spanish
Windows 1252
Spanish Variation
Windows 1252
Swedish
Windows 1252
Swiss French
Windows 1252
Swiss German
Windows 1252
Tatar
Windows 1251
Thai-Kedmanee
Windows 874
Turkish F
Windows 1254
Turkish Q
Windows 1254
Ukrainian
Windows 1251
United Kingdom
Windows 1252
United States
Windows 1252
US Dvorak
Windows 1252
US Dvorak Left Hand
Windows 1252
US Dvorak Right Hand
Windows 1252
US International
Windows 1252
Uzbek Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Vietnamese
Windows 1258
512
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes
Scan the barcode corresponding to the country keyboard code page.
Windows 1250
Latin 2, Central European
Windows 1251
Cyrillic, Slavic
Windows 1252
Latin 1, Western European
Windows 1253
Greek
Windows 1254
Latin 5, Turkish
513
Country Code Pages
Windows 1250
Latin 2, Central European
Windows 1251
Cyrillic, Slavic
Windows 1252
Latin 1, Western European
Windows 1253
Greek
Windows 1254
Latin 5, Turkish
514
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
Windows 1255
Hebrew
Windows 1256
Arabic
Windows 1257
Baltic
Windows 1258
Vietnamese
Windows 874
Thai
515
Country Code Pages
Windows 1255
Hebrew
Windows 1256
Arabic
Windows 1257
Baltic
Windows 1258
Vietnamese
Windows 874
Thai
516
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
Windows 20866
Cyrillic KOI8-R
Windows 932
Japanese Shift-JIS
Windows 936
Simplified Chinese GBK
Windows 54936
Simplified Chinese GB18030
Windows 949
Korean Hangul
517
Country Code Pages
Windows 20866
Cyrillic KOI8-R
Windows 932
Japanese Shift-JIS
Windows 936
Simplified Chinese GBK
Windows 54936
Simplified Chinese GB18030
Windows 949
Korean Hangul
518
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
Windows 950
Traditional Chinese Big5
MS-DOS 437
Latin US
MS-DOS 737
Greek
MS-DOS 775
Baltic
MS-DOS 850
Latin 1
519
Country Code Pages
Windows 950
Traditional Chinese Big5
MS-DOS 437
Latin US
MS-DOS 737
Greek
MS-DOS 775
Baltic
MS-DOS 850
Latin 1
520
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
MS-DOS 852
Latin 2
MS-DOS 855
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 857
Turkish
MS-DOS 860
Portuguese
MS-DOS 861
Icelandic
521
Country Code Pages
MS-DOS 852
Latin 2
MS-DOS 855
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 857
Turkish
MS-DOS 860
Portuguese
MS-DOS 861
Icelandic
522
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
MS-DOS 862
Hebrew
MS-DOS 863
French Canada
MS-DOS 865
Nordic
MS-DOS 866
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 869
Greek 2
523
Country Code Pages
MS-DOS 862
Hebrew
MS-DOS 863
French Canada
MS-DOS 865
Nordic
MS-DOS 866
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 869
Greek 2
524
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
ISO 8859-1
Latin 1, Western European
ISO 8859-2
Latin 2, Central European
ISO 8859-3
Latin 3, South European
ISO 8859-4
Latin 4, North European
ISO 8859-5
Cyrillic
525
Country Code Pages
ISO 8859-1
Latin 1, Western European
ISO 8859-2
Latin 2, Central European
ISO 8859-3
Latin 3, South European
ISO 8859-4
Latin 4, North European
ISO 8859-5
Cyrillic
526
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
ISO 8859-6
Arabic
ISO 8859-7
Greek
ISO 8859-8
Hebrew
ISO 8859-9
Latin 5, Turkish
ISO 8859-10
Latin 6, Nordic
527
Country Code Pages
ISO 8859-6
Arabic
ISO 8859-7
Greek
ISO 8859-8
Hebrew
ISO 8859-9
Latin 5, Turkish
ISO 8859-10
Latin 6, Nordic
528
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
ISO 8859-11
Thai
ISO 8859-13
Latin 7, Baltic
ISO 8859-14
Latin 8, Celtic
ISO 8859-15
Latin 9
ISO 8859-16
Latin 10, South-Eastern European
529
Country Code Pages
ISO 8859-11
Thai
ISO 8859-13
Latin 7, Baltic
ISO 8859-14
Latin 8, Celtic
ISO 8859-15
Latin 9
ISO 8859-16
Latin 10, South-Eastern European
530
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes (continued)
UTF-8
UTF-16LE
UTF-16 Little Endian
UTF-16BE
UTF-16 Big Endian
Mac CP10000
Roman
UTF-8
531
Country Code Pages
UTF-16LE
UTF-16 Little Endian
UTF-16BE
UTF-16 Big Endian
Mac CP10000
Roman
532
CJK Decode Control
Introduction
This appendix describes control parameters for CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode decode through USB
HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
NOTE: Because ADF does not support CJK character processing, there is no format manipulation for CJK
output.
533
CJK Decode Control
CJK Control Parameters
Unicode Output Control
Parameter # 973
For a Unicode encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for unicode output:
•
Universal Output to Unicode and MBCS Application - This default method applies to Unicode and
MBCS expected applications, such as MS Word and Notepad on a Windows host.
NOTE: To support Unicode universal output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK
Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 543.
•
Output to Unicode Application Only - This method applies only to Unicode expected applications, such
as MS Word and WordPad, but not Notepad.
*Universal Output
(0)
Unicode Application Only
(1)
*Universal Output
(0)
Unicode Application Only
(1)
534
CJK Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host
Parameter # 972
For a national standard encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for CJK output to a Windows
host:
•
Universal CJK Output - This is the default universal CJK output method for US English IME or
Chinese/Japanese/Korean ASCII IME on a Windows host. This method converts CJK characters to
Unicode and emulates the characters when transmitting to the host. Use the Unicode Output Control
parameter to control Unicode output.
NOTE: To support universal CJK output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK
Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 543.
•
Other options for CJK output - With the following methods, the scanner sends the CJK character
hexadecimal internal code (Nei Ma) value to the host, or converts the CJK character to Unicode and sends
the hexadecimal Unicode value to the host. When using these methods, the Windows host must select the
corresponding IME to accept the CJK character. See Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on
page 543.
•
Japanese Unicode Output
•
Simplified Chinese GBK Code Output
•
Simplified Chinese Unicode Output
•
Korean Unicode Code Output
•
Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows XP)
•
Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows 7)
•
Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows XP)
•
Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows 7)
NOTE: The Unicode emulate output method depends on the host system (Windows XP or Windows 7).
*Universal CJK Output
(0)
Japanese Unicode Output
(34)
(For Japanese Unicode Output, select Simplified
Chinese Unicode IME on the Windows host)
535
CJK Decode Control
*Universal CJK Output
(0)
Japanese Unicode Output
(34)
(For Japanese Unicode Output, select Simplified
Chinese Unicode IME on the Windows host)
536
CJK Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host (continued)
Chinese (Simplified) GBK Output
(1)
Chinese (Simplified) Unicode Output
(2)
Korean Unicode Output
(50)
(for Korean Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese
Unicode IME on the Windows host)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows XP)
(17)
Chinese (Simplified) GBK Output
(1)
Chinese (Simplified) Unicode Output
(2)
537
CJK Decode Control
Korean Unicode Output
(50)
(for Korean Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese
Unicode IME on the Windows host)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows XP)
(17)
538
CJK Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host (continued)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows 7)
(19)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows
XP)
(18)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows 7)
(20)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows 7)
(19)
539
CJK Decode Control
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows
XP)
(18)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows 7)
(20)
540
CJK Decode Control
Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output
Parameter # 960
Some country keyboard type layouts contain characters that do not exist in the default code page (see Country
Keyboard Type Missing Characters on page 542). Although the default code page can not encode these
characters in a barcode, they can be encoded in the UTF-8 barcode. Scan the following barcode to output the
Unicode values by emulation mode.
NOTE: Use this special country keyboard type to decode the non-CJK UTF-8 barcode. After decoding,
re-configure the scanner to use the original country keyboard type.
Use US English IME on Windows. See Unicode Output Control on page 534.
Non-CJK UTF-8 Emulation Output
Non-CJK UTF-8 Emulation Output
541
CJK Decode Control
Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters
Country keyboard type: Tatar, Uzbek, Mongolian, Kyrgyz, Kazakh and Azeri
Default code page: CP1251
Missing characters:
ғ
Ғ
ҳ
Ҳ
қ
Қ
һ
Һ
ө
Ө
ə
Ə
ү
Ү
ң
Ң
җ
Җ
₮
ң
Ң
ұ
Ұ
қ
Қ
ҹ
Ҹ
ҝ
Ҝ
Country keyboard type: Romanian (Standard)
Default code page: CP1250
Missing characters:
ș
Ș
ț
Ț
Country keyboard type: Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT), Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT2)
Default code page: CP1252
Missing character:
₢
542
CJK Decode Control
Country keyboard type: Azeri-Latin
Default code page: CP1254
Missing characters: ə, Ə
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host
This section describes how to set up CJK decode with a Windows host.
Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output
To support the Unicode universal output method, set up the Windows host registry table as follows:
1.
Select Start > Run > regedt32 to start the registry editor.
2.
Under HKEY_Current_User\Control Panel\Input Method, set EnableHexNumpad to 1 as follows:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method]
"EnableHexNumpad"="1"
If this key does not exist, add it as type REG_SZ (string value).
3.
Reboot the computer to implement the registry change.
Adding CJK IME on Windows
To add the desired CJK input language:
1.
Click Start > Control Panel.
2.
If the Control Panel opens in category view, select Switch to Classic View in the top left corner.
3.
Select Regional and Language Options.
4.
Click the Language tab.
5.
Under Supplemental Language Support, select the Install Files for East Asian Languages check box if not
already selected, and click Apply. This may require a Windows installation CD to install the required files. This
step ensures that the East Asian Languages (CJK) are available.
6.
Under Text Services and Input Language, click Details.
7.
Under Installed Services, click Add.
8.
In the Add Input Language dialog box, choose the CJK input language and keyboard layout or Input Method
Editor (IME) to add.
9.
Click OK twice. The language indicator appears in the system tray (at bottom right corner of the desktop by
default). To switch between input languages (keyboard languages) select the language indicator in the system
tray.
10. Select the language indicator in the system tray to select the desired country keyboard type.
11. Verify that the characters displayed on each country's keyboard appear.
543
CJK Decode Control
Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Simplified Chinese input method:
•
Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows XP: Chinese (Simplified) - NeiMa, then click the input bar to
select Unicode or GBK NeiMa input.
Or
•
Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows 7: Chinese (Simplified) - Microsoft Pinyin New Experience
Input Style, then select Tool Menu > Secondary Inputs > Unicode Input or GB Code Input.
544
CJK Decode Control
Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Traditional Chinese input method:
•
Select Unicode input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Unicode
•
Select Big5 input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Big5 Code
•
Select Unicode/Big5 input on Windows 7: Chinese (Traditional) - New Quick. This option support both
Unicode and Big5 input.
545
Signature Capture Code
Introduction
CapCode, a signature capture code, is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows
a scanner to capture a signature.
There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form.
For example, on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas, one each for two joint filers, and
one for a professional preparer. By using different patterns, a program can correctly identify all three, so they can
be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly.
Code Structure
Signature Capture Area
A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box, as shown in Figure 19.
Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box.
The box is optional, so you can omit it, replace it with a single baseline, or print a baseline with an "X" on top of it
towards the left, as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature. However, if an "X" or other
markings are added in the signature box area, these are captured with the signature.
Figure 19
CapCode
] tÇx WÉ
x
546
Signature Capture Code
CapCode Pattern Structure
A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space, a signature capture box, a
second separator space, and then a stop pattern. Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element, the
start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces. A 7X quiet zone is required to the left
and to the right of the CapCode pattern.
Figure 20
CapCode Structure
Capture Box
Start
Quiet
Zone
Stop
Separator Spaces
Quiet
Zone
The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide.
Start / Stop Patterns
Table 50 lists the accepted start / stop patterns. The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X. You
must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box. The type value is reported with the captured
signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured.
Table 50
Start / Stop Pattern Definitions
Bar/Space Patterns
B
S
B
S
B
S
Type
B
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
5
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
7
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
8
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
Table 51 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature.
Table 51
User Defined CapCode Parameters
Parameter
Defined
Width
Number of pixels
Height
Number of pixels
Format
JPEG, BMP, TIFF
JPEG quality
1 (most compression) to 100 (best quality)
Bits Per Pixel
(not applicable to JPEG format)
1 (2 levels)
4 (16 levels)
8 (256 levels)
547
Signature Capture Code
BMP format does not use compression, JPEG and TIFF formats do.
Dimensions
The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns. The
line width of the signature capture box is insignificant.
The thinnest element width, referred to here as X, is nominally 10 mils (1 mil = 0.0254 mm). Select this as an exact
multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used. For example, when using a 203 DPI (dots-per-inch) printer and
printing 2 dots per module, the resulting X dimension is 9.85 mils.
Data Format
The decoder output is formatted according to Table 52. Zebra decoders allow different user options to output or
inhibit barcode type. Selecting "Symbol ID" as the barcode type for output identifies the CapCode with letter "i".
Table 52
Data Format
File Format
(1 byte)
JPEG - 1
BMP - 3
TIFF - 4
Type (1 byte)
Image Size
(4 bytes, BIG Endian)
See Table 50, last
column
Image Data
(Same bytes as in a
data file)
Additional Capabilities
Regardless of how the signature is captured, the output signature image is de-skewed and right-side up.
A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a barcode. You
can disable the signature capturing capability in a decoder.
548
Signature Capture Code
Signature Boxes
Figure 21 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes:
Figure 21
Acceptable Signature Boxes
Type 2:
Type 5:
Type 7:
Type 8:
Type 9:
549
Non-Parameter Attributes
Introduction
This appendix defines non-parameter attributes.
Attributes
Model Number
Attribute #533
Model number of the scanner. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example
SA4608-SR00006ZZWW.
Type
S
Size (Bytes)
18
User Mode Access
R
Values
Variable
Serial Number
Attribute #534
Unique serial number assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the
physical device label, for example M1J26F45V.
Type
S
Size (Bytes)
16
User Mode Access
R
Values
Variable
550
Non-Parameter Attributes
Date of Manufacture
Attribute #535
Date of device manufacture assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on
the physical device label, for example 30APR19 (which reads the 30th of April 2019).
Type
S
Size (Bytes)
7
User Mode Access
R
Values
Variable
Date of First Programming
Attribute #614
Date of first electronic programming represents the first time settings where electronically loaded to the scanner
either by 123Scan or via SMS, for example 18MAY19 (which reads the 18th of May 2019).
Type
S
Size (Bytes)
7
User Mode Access
R
Values
Variable
Configuration Filename
Attribute #616
The name assigned to the configuration settings loaded electronically to the device either by 123Scan or via SMS.
NOTE: Scanning the Set Defaults barcode automatically changes the configuration filename to factory defaults.
To indicate the configuration settings loaded to the device were changed, the configuration filename changes to
Modified upon scanning any parameter barcode.
Type
S
Size (Bytes)
17
User Mode Access
RW
Values
Variable
551
Non-Parameter Attributes
Beeper/LED
Attribute #6000
Activates the beeper and/or LED.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access
W
Values:
Table 53
Beeper/LED Values
Beep / LED Action
Value
Beep / LED Action
Value
1 high short beep
0
1 low long beep
15
2 high short beeps
1
2 low long beeps
16
3 high short beeps
2
3 low long beeps
17
4 high short beeps
3
4 low long beeps
18
5 high short beeps
4
5 low long beeps
19
1 low short beep
5
Fast warble beep
20
2 low short beeps
6
Slow warble beep
21
3 low short beeps
7
High-low beep
22
4 low short beeps
8
Low-high beep
23
5 low short beeps
9
High-low-high beep
24
1 high long beep
10
Low-high-low beep
25
2 high long beeps
11
High-high-low-low beep
26
3 high long beeps
12
Green LED off
42
4 high long beeps
13
Green LED on
43
5 high long beeps
14
Red LED on
47
Red LED off
48
552
Non-Parameter Attributes
Parameter Defaults
Attribute #6001
This attribute restores all parameters to their factory defaults.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access
W
Values
0 = Restore Defaults
1 = Restore Factory Defaults
2 = Write Custom Defaults
Beep on Next Bootup
Attribute #6003
This attribute configures (enables or disables) beep on next boot up of scanner.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access
W
Values
0 = Disable beep on next bootup
1 = Enable beep on next bootup
Reboot
Attribute #6004
This attribute initiates a device reboot.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access
W
Values
N/A
Host Trigger Session
Attribute #6005
This attribute triggers a decode session similar to manually depressing the scanner trigger button.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access
W
Values
1 = Start Host Trigger Session
0 = Stop Host Trigger Session
553
Non-Parameter Attributes
Firmware Version
Attribute #20004
The scanner's operating system version. For example, NBRFMAAC or PAAAABS00-007-R03D0.
Type
S
Size (Bytes)
Variable
User Mode Access
R
Values
Variable
Scankit Version
Attribute #20008
Identifies the 1D decode algorithms resident on the device, for example SKIT4.33T02.
Type
S
Size (Bytes)
Variable
User Mode Access
R
Values
Variable
554
Sample Barcodes
IMPORTANT:
To read a sample barcode the parameter must be enabled. To enable a parameter scan the
appropriate Enable barcode in Symbologies.
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100%
0
12345 67890
5
UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on
34
0
12345
555
67890
Sample Barcodes
UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on
98765
0
12345
67890
UPC-E
0
425261
4
UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on
98
0
425261
556
Sample Barcodes
UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on
87654
0
425261
EAN-8
EAN-13, 100%
3 456789 012340
557
Sample Barcodes
EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on
12
3
456789
012340
EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on
54321
3
456789
012340
Code 128
1234567890
558
Sample Barcodes
GS1-128
(01)94019097685457(13)170119(30)17
Code 39
123ABC
Code 93
559
Sample Barcodes
Code 11 with 2 Check Digits
2468101275
Interleaved 2 of 5
12345678901231
MSI with 2 Check Digits
123455834
560
Sample Barcodes
Chinese 2 of 5
45454545454
Matrix 2 of 5
223344
Korean 3 of 5
1400230
561
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)
7612341562341
GS1 DataBar Truncated
(01)00614141999996
GS1 DataBar Stacked
562
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
563
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Data Matrix
564
Sample Barcodes
GS1 Data Matrix
Maxicode
QR Code
GS1 QR
565
Sample Barcodes
MicroQR
Aztec
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456
7890123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123
456789
Grid Matrix
NOTE Grid Matrix must be enabled to read the following barcode (see Grid Matrix on page 316).
566
Sample Barcodes
Han Xin
Postal Codes
US Postnet
UK Postal
Japan Postal
5008861
567
Sample Barcodes
Australian Post
39549554
OCR
OCR-A
OCR-B
MICR E13B
568
Sample Barcodes
US Currency
569
Index
Numerics
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2D barcodes
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
grid matrix mirrored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
han xin inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
pattern, snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ASCII character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
assembling the stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
attributes, non-parameter
beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
aztec bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
aztec barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
A
B
accessories
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
stands and holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 387
invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 48, 387
aiming
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
pattern, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
pattern, hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
bar codes
analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
securPharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
securPharm output formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
triggered timeout, same symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
barcodes
1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
alphanumeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
beeper duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
570
Index
country keyboard types (country codes) . . . . . . .491
crop to address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
decode pager motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
decode pager motor duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
direct decode indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
disable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
DPM illumination control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
DPM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
driver’s license parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
driver’s license date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
driver’s license gender format . . . . . . . . . . . .405
no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
parsing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 393, 394
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
enable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
FN1 substitution values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
grid matrix mirrored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
convert to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
GS1 databar expanded security level . . . . . .292
GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . .291
GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . .288
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . .159
hand-held trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
hands-free decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . .160
hands-free mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
IBM
barcode configuration directive . . . . . . . . . . .127
beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
IDC
beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
CJK
non-CJK UTF barcode output . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
output method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
code 128 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . 247
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
trioptic code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
composite
beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
continuous barcode read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
country code pages . . 513, 515, 517, 519, 521, 523,
525, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527, 529, 531
country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
571
Index
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
LED on good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
macro PDF
abort entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
flush buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
manufacturing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
mobile phone/display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
motion tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
night mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
night mode toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
night mode trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 451
numeric barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
OCR
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
check digit multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
check digit validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
inverse OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
maximum characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
MICR E13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
minimum character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
OCR-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
OCR-A variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
OCR-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
OCR-B variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
US currency serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
pager motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
border type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
captured image brighten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
captured image sharpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
find box outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
maximum rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
maximum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
minimum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
X coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Y coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
zoom limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 194
illumination brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
image capture
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
image file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
keyboard wedge
alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . . 133
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
send make and break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
572
Index
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
boot up event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
check parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
data packet format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
decode event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
host character timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
host RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
interpacket delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
multipacket option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
parameter event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
suppress power up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
symbologies
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
timeout between decodes, different symbols . . .165
timeout between decodes, same symbol . . . . . .165
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
unique barcode reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
unsolicited heartbeat interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
UPC/EAN/JAN
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
transmit UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
transmit UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . .232
USB
barcode configuration directive . . . . . . . . . . . .76
beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
picklist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
pid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
pid value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 326
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 325
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . 329
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
RS-232
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
nixdorf beep LED options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 116
stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
send versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
signature capture bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
signature capture height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
signature capture JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
signature capture width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
silence operational mode changes . . . . . . . . . . . 198
snapshot aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SSI
573
Index
decode setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
cleaning the devices
approved disinfectant cleaners for healthcare devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
approved for standard devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
how to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
codabar barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
code 11 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
code 11 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
code 128 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
code 128 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
code 128 emulation barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
code 39 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 559
code 39 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
code 39 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
trioptic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
code 93 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
code 93 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
code identifiers
AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
communication protocol
CDC beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
direct I/O beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
fast HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
keyboard FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
keypad emulation with leading zero . . . . . . . . 71
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
user preferences
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
video frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
video image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
video mode format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
video resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
beeper
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
suppress on power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
C
cables
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
character sets
ALT key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
extended key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
F key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
GUI key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
numeric key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
PF key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Chinese 2 of 5 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
CJK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
country keyboard missing characters . . . . . . . . . 542
574
Index
driver’s license parsing
ADF example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
field parsing barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 393, 394
gender format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
rule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
composite barcodes
beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
configurations
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
stands and holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
connecting
IBM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
conventions
notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
country code pages . 513, 515, 517, 519, 521, 523, 525,
527, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529, 531
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
cropping images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E
eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
error indications
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
exposure options
analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 194
presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
D
G
data matrix bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566, 567, 568
data matrix barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
decode zones
ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
DL parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
digital scanner
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
discrete 2 of 5 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
gain
analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
gooseneck Intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 39
grid matrix bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
gs1 data matrix bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
GS1 databar bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
GS1 databar barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . .289
GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
GS1 databar expanded security level . . . . . . . . .292
GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . . .291
GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
GS1 QR bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
H
han xin bar codes
575
Index
febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
han xin barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
host types
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
J
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
I
IBM
K
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
barcode acceptance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
capture region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
demonstrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
image post processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
quick start form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
sample setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 194
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
image capture
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
image options
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
information, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
interface
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 24
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
keyboard types (country codes)
Albanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Arabic (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Arabic (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Arabic (102) Azerty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Azeri (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Azeri (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Belarusian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Bosnian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Bosnian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Bulgarian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Canadian French (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Canadian French Win7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Canadian Multilingual Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Chinese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Chinese (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Chinese (Traditional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Croatian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Czech (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Czech (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Dutch (Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Estonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Faeroese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
French (Canada) 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
French (Canada) 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
French (France) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
French International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Galician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Greek (220) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Greek (319) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Greek 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Greek 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Greek Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Greek Polytonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Hebrew Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
576
Index
Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
keyboard wedge
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
keyboard map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Korean 2 of 5 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Korean 3 of 5 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Hungarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Hungarian_101KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Irish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Islandic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Italian (142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Japanese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Kazakh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Korean (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Korean (Hangul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Kyrgyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Latin American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Latvian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Latvian (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Lithuanian (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Macedonian (FYROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Maltese_47KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Mongolian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Polish (214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Polish (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Portuguese (Brazil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Portuguese (Portugal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Romanian (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Romanian (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Romanian (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Russian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Russian (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Serbian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Serbian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Slovak (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Slovenian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Spanish (Variation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Swiss French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Swiss German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Tatar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Thai (Kedmanee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Turkish F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Turkish Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
UK English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Ukranian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
US Dvorak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
US Dvorak Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
US Dvorak Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
US English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
US International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Uzbek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
L
LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
M
macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
abort entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
flush buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
approved cleaners for standard devices . . . . . . . .44
approved disinfectant cleaners for healthcare devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
how to clean the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
matrix 2 of 5 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
matrix 2 of 5 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
maxicode barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 387
microPDF417 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
microQR code bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
mounting
wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
mounting the stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
MSI bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
MSI barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
multicode data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 387
N
night mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
non-parameter attributes
beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
577
Index
Q
configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
QR code bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566, 567, 568
QR code barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
R
related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
related software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
RS-232
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
host parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
RSM
commands and responses over SSI . . . . . . . . . . .85
O
OCR
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
P
page
motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PDF417 bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
PDF417 barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
pinouts
scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
postal code bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
postal code barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . . . 329
power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
power supply
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 388
presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39
field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
product id (pid) value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
product id type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
S
sample bar codes
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 559
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566, 567, 568
grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
gs1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Korean 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
microQR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566, 567, 568
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
scanning
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
hand-held mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 40
hands-free mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 39
security
1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
setting defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
578
Index
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
setup
connecting a keyboard wedge host . . . . . . . . . . 129
connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
connecting an IBM most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
installing interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
signature boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
start and stop patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
software tools
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 387
MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 387
preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 388
specifications
DS4608-DPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DS4608-HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DS4608-SR/DS4608-DL/DS4608-HD/DS4608-HL 50
SSI
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 83
data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
event reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 83
low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
stand
assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
symbologies
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
U
unicode
output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
decode supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
transmit UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
transmit UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . . . . .232
USB
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
V
version
barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
video
formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
T
technical specifications
DS4608-DPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DS4608-HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DS4608-SR/DS4608-DL/DS4608-HD/DS4608-HL 50
trigger mode, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
579
www.zebra.com
">